Asus P5W DH User Manual
Motherboard P5W DH Deluxe
ii E2557 First Edition V1 May 2006 Copyright é 2006 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiîÂÂed or altered, unless such repair , modiîÂÂcation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiîÂÂcation or explanation and to the ownersâ beneîÂÂt, without intent to infringe.
iii Contents Notices ........................................................................................................ vii Safety information .................................................................................... viii About this guide ......................................................................................... ix P5W DH Deluxe speciîÂÂcations summary ................................................. xi Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features ............................................................................ 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ........................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 ASUS AI Life features ................................................... 1-6 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features .............................................. 1-6 1.3.4 Digital Home features ................................................... 1-9 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ........................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes .................................................................... 2-2 2.2.3 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ......................................................... 2-3 2.2.4 Motherboard layout ......................................................... 2-4 2.2.5 Layout contents ............................................................... 2-5 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................... 2-7 2.3.1 Installing the CPU ........................................................... 2-8 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan .............................. 2-10 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan ......................... 2-12 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-14 2.4.1 Overview ....................................................................... 2-14 2.4.2 Memory conîÂÂgurations .................................................. 2-14 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM .......................................................... 2-21 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ........................................................ 2-21 2.5 Expansion slots .......................................................................... 2-22 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card ......................................... 2-22 2.5.2 ConîÂÂguring an expansion card ..................................... 2-22 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments ................................................... 2-23 2.5.4 PCI slots ........................................................................ 2-24 2.5.5 PCI Express x1 slot ....................................................... 2-24 2.5.6 T wo PCI Express x16 slots ........................................... 2-24
iv Contents 2.6 Jumpers ...................................................................................... 2-26 2.7 Connectors ................................................................................. 2-28 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .................................................. 2-28 2.7.2 Internal connectors ....................................................... 2-31 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the îÂÂrst time ........................................................ 3-1 3.2 T urning off the computer ............................................................. 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function .................................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch .............................. 3-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-1 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility ........................................................ 4-1 4.1.2 Creating a bootable îÂÂoppy disk ....................................... 4-4 4.1.3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility ................................................... 4-5 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility ................................................................ 4-6 4.1.5 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility ...................................... 4-9 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................. 4-10 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen .........................................................4-1 1 4.2.2 Menu bar ........................................................................4-1 1 4.2.3 Navigation keys ..............................................................4-1 1 4.2.4 Menu items ................................................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ............................................................ 4-12 4.2.6 ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds ....................................................... 4-12 4.2.7 Pop-up window ............................................................. 4-12 4.2.8 Scroll bar ....................................................................... 4-12 4.2.9 General help ................................................................. 4-12 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................. 4-13 4.3.1 System T ime ................................................................. 4-13 4.3.2 System Date ................................................................. 4-13 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ........................................................ 4-13 4.3.4 Language ...................................................................... 4-13 4.3.5 Primary , Third, and Fourth IDE Master/Slave ............... 4-14 4.3.6 IDE ConîÂÂguration .......................................................... 4-15 4.3.7 System Information ....................................................... 4-17
v Contents 4.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-18 4.4.1 JumperFree ConîÂÂguration ............................................ 4-18 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status ......................................................... 4-22 4.4.3 USB ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-23 4.4.4 CPU ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-24 4.4.5 Chipset .......................................................................... 4-26 4.4.6 Onboard Devices ConîÂÂguration .................................... 4-28 4.4.7 PCI PnP ........................................................................ 4-30 4.4.8 DH Feature page .......................................................... 4-31 4.5 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-32 4.5.1 Suspend Mode .............................................................. 4-32 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume ........................................ 4-32 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support .......................................................... 4-32 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support ....................................................... 4-32 4.5.5 APM ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-33 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor ......................................................... 4-35 4.6 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-38 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority ...................................................... 4-38 4.6.2 Hard Disk Drives ........................................................... 4-39 4.6.3 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration .......................................... 4-39 4.6.4 Security ......................................................................... 4-41 4.7 T ools menu ................................................................................. 4-43 4.7.1 ASUS Music Alarm ........................................................ 4-43 4.7.2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 .......................................................... 4-45 4.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-46 Chapter 5: Software support 5.1 Installing an operating system ................................................... 5-1 5.2 Support CD information .............................................................. 5-1 5.2.1 Running the support CD ................................................. 5-1 5.2.2 Drivers menu ................................................................... 5-2 5.2.3 Utilities menu .................................................................. 5-3 5.2.4 Make Disk menu ............................................................. 5-6 5.2.5 Manual menu .................................................................. 5-7 5.2.6 Contact information ......................................................... 5-7 5.2.7 Other information ............................................................ 5-8
vi Contents 5.3 Software information ................................................................. 5-10 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo 2 ........................................................... 5-10 5.3.2 AI NET2 ........................................................................ 5-12 5.3.3 Audio conîÂÂgurations ..................................................... 5-13 5.3.4 ASUS PC Probe II ......................................................... 5-20 5.3.5 ASUS Music Alarm ........................................................ 5-26 5.4 RAID conîÂÂgurations .................................................................. 5-29 5.4.1 Installing Serial A T A hard disks ..................................... 5-30 5.4.2 Intel î RAID conîÂÂgurations ............................................. 5-30 5.4.3 JMicron î RAID ConîÂÂguration ........................................ 5-40 5.4.4 Silicon Image î RAID conîÂÂguration ................................ 5-48 5.4.5 Cross-RAID ConîÂÂguration: Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) with ASUS EZ-Backup and Intel ICH7R î ... 5-61 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ....................................................... 5-64 5.5.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS .... 5-64 5.5.2 Creating a RAID driver disk in Windows î ...................... 5-64 Chapter 6: A TI î CrossFire⢠technology support 6.1 Overview ....................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 Requirements .................................................................. 6-1 6.1.2 Before you begin ............................................................. 6-1 6.2 Installing CrossFire⢠graphics cards ....................................... 6-2 6.3 Software information ................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1 Installing the device drivers ............................................. 6-5 6.3.2 Using the Catalyst⢠Control Center ............................... 6-7 Appendix: CPU features A.1 Intel î EM64T .................................................................................. A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) ........................ A-1 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading T echnology ........................................... A-3
vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturer âÂÂs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiîÂÂcations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user âÂÂs authority to operate this equipment.
viii Safety information Electrical safety ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adpater or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company . ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to îÂÂx it by yourself. Contact a qualiîÂÂed service technician or your retailer . Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately . ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠Avoid dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualiîÂÂed service technician or your retailer . This symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical and electronic equipment) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products.
ix About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and conîÂÂguring the motherboard. How this guide is organized This guide contains the following parts: ⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Descriptions of the BIOS items are also provided. ⢠Chapter 5: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ⢠Chapter 6: A TI CrossFire⢠support This chapter describes the A TI CrossFire⢠feature and shows the graphics card installation procedures. ⢠Appendix: CPU features The Appendix describes the CPU features and technologies that the motherboard supports. Where to îÂÂnd more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. Optional documentation Y our product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty îÂÂyers, that may have been added by your dealer . These documents are not part of the standard package.
x Conventions used in this guide T o make sure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. T ypography Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Key s encl osed i n the less- than a nd gre ater-t han s ign mea ns tha t you must p ress the enclo sed ke y. Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key . <Key1 Key2 Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously , the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl Alt D> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /i[î¿lename] afudos /ip5wdh.rom DANGER/W ARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: T ips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
xi P5W DH Deluxe speciî¿cations summary CPU LGA775 socket for Intel î Pentium î 4/Celeron î processor Supports Intel î Pentium î Processor Extreme Edition and Intel î Pentium î D Processor Supports Intel î next generation 65 nm and Intel Intel î Core ⢠2 Duo/Intel Intel î Core ⢠2 Extreme processors processors Supports Intel î next generation Multi-Core processor Compatible with Intel î 05B/ 05A and 04B/04A processors Intel î EM64T and Hyper-Threading T echnology ready Chipset Intelî 975X Intelî ICH7R Front Side Bus 1066 / 800 MHz Memory Dual-channel memory architecture - 4 x 240-pin DIMM sockets support ECC/non-ECC DDR2 800/667/533 MHz memory modules - Supports up to 8 GB system memory Intel î MPT (Intel î Memory Pipeline T echnology) ASUS Hyper Path3 Note: Visit the ASUS website at www.asus.com for the latest QualiîÂÂed V endors List (QVL). Expansion slots 2 x PCI Express⢠x16 slots for discrete graphics card 2 x PCI Express⢠x1 slots 3 x PCI slots CrossFire⢠Supports A TI CrossFire⢠graphics cards (both at x8 mode) ASUS T wo-slot thermal design ASUS PEG Link Advanced Thermal Design ASUS 8-Phase Power Design ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Fanless Design: Heat-pipe thermal solution Storage/RAID Intel î ICH7R Southbridge supports: - 1 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 - 3 x Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s devices with RAID 0,1, 5 conîÂÂguration - Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology Jmicron î JMB363 Serial A T A controller supports: - 1 x External Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s (SA T A-on-the-Go) - 1 x Internal Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s with RAID 0, 1 conîÂÂguration with External Serial A T A 3.0 �b/s External Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s - 1 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 connector for two devices Note: Do not remove/unplug the External SA T A device when running under RAID mode. Silicon Image î 4723 Hardware RAID controller (ASUS EZ-Backup) supports: - 2 x Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s with RAID 0 and RAID 1 conîÂÂguration (continued on the next page)
xii P5W DH Deluxe speciî¿cations summary Storage/RAID (continued) Supports RAID 10 through cross-conîÂÂguration between three (3) Serial A T A ports from Intel î ICH7R and one (1) Serial A T A port fr om Silicon Image î 4723 Hardware RAID controller LAN Marvell î 88E8053 dual Gigabit LAN controllers, both featuring AI NET2 Wireless LAN: 54 Mbps IEEE 802.1 1g (ASUS WiFi-AP Soloâ¢) High DeîÂÂnition Audio Realtek î ALC882M 8-channel CODEC Supports Multi-Streaming, Jack-Sensing and Jack-Retasking T echnology Anti-Pop Function Optical and Coaxial S/PDIF Out interfaces Features Dolby î Master Studio T echnology - Dolby ProLogic IIX - Dolby Headphone - Dolby Virtual Speaker - Dolby Digital Live IEEE 1394 TI 1394 controller supports: - 2 x IEEE 1394a connectors (1 at mid-board, 1 on the rear panel) USB Supports up to 8 USB 2.0/1.1 ports ASUS Digital Home features ASUS EZ Backup⢠- 2 x Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s support hardware RAID 0 or RAID 1 mode - Plug and play: Default setting in RAID 1 mode requires no driver and no BIOS conîÂÂguration ASUS Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠- 54 Mbps IEEE 802.1 1g, backward compatible with 1 1 Mbps IEEE 802.1b - Software Access Point mode - Station mode: Infrastructure mode and Ad-Hoc mode ASUS DH Remote⢠- Power - Quick Power - Noise off - EZ WiFi - AP Launch - Full Screen - Media Control Zone ASUS MP3-In⢠(continued on the next page)
xiii P5W DH Deluxe speciî¿cations summary (continued on the next page) ASUS AI Life features Stack Cool 2 patented fanless cooling system SA T A-On-The-Go external Serial A T A port AI Quiet ASUS Exclusive Overclocking features Intelligent overclocking tools: - AI NOS⢠(Non-delay Overclocking System) - AI Overclocking (intelligent CPU frequency tuner) - ASUS PEG Link (automatic performance tuning for single/dual graphics cards) Precision T weaker: - vDIMM: 12-step DRAM voltage control - vCore: Adjustable CPU voltage at 0.0125 V increment - Stepless Frequency Selection(SFS) allows FSB tuning from 200 MHz up to 400 MHz at 1 MHz increment - PCI Express x16 frequency tuning from 90 MHz to 150 MHz at 1 MHz increment Adjustable FSB/DDR ratio Fixed PCI/PCI Express frequencies Overclocking protection: - ASUS C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) ASUS AI Booster Utility Other ASUS special features ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 ASUS Q-Fan2 ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS MyLogo 2 Rear panel 1 x PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 1 x PS/2 mouse port (green) 1 x Serial port 1 x IEEE 1394a port 1 x External Serial A T A port 1 x Optical S/PDIF Out port 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 2 x LAN (RJ-45) ports 4 x USB 2.0/1.1 ports 1 x WiFi-AP Solo⢠antenna jack 8-channel audio ports
xiv P5W DH Deluxe speciî¿cations summary Internal connectors 2 x USB 2.0 connectors support four additional USB 2.0 ports 2 x IDE connectors 1 x Floppy disk drive connector 6 x Serial A T A connectors 1 x IEEE1394a connector 1 x CPU / 2 x Chassis / 2 x Power fan connectors 1 x Azalia Digital Header (ADH) Front panel High DeîÂÂnition Audio connector Chassis intrusion connector CD audio-in connector MP3 audio-in connector S/PDIF Out connector 24-pin A TX power connector 4-pin A TX12 V power connector System panel connector ASUS EZ Backup RAID selection mode jumper BIOS features 8 Mb Flash ROM,AMI BIOS, PnP , DMI2.0, WfM2.0, SM BIOS 2.3, PXE & RPL Manageability WOL by PME,WOR by PME, Chassis Intrusion Power requirements A TX power supply (with 24-pin and 4-pin 12 V plugs) A TX 12 V 2.0 compliant Support CD contents Device Drivers Make RAID driver disk for Intel î ICH7R and JMicron î JMB 363 RAID Manuals for Intel Intel î ICH7R, ASUS EZ-Backup, JMicron î JMB 363, and Cross-RAID (RAID 10) ASUS PC Probe 2 ASUS LiveUpdate Utility ASUS DH Remote application ASUS WiFi-AP Solo⢠Wizard Anti-virus utility (OEM version) Intervideo î WinDVD î software Form factor A TX form factor: 12 in x 9.6 in (30.5 cm x 24.5 cm) *SpeciîÂÂcations are subject to change without notice.
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features ............................................................................ 1-2
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 1-1 1.1 Welcome! Th ank yo u f or b uyi ng an A SUS î P5W DH Deluxe motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below . 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer . ASUS Digital Home Accessories ⢠ASUS DH Remote ⢠ASUS DH Remote receiver ⢠ASUS WiFi-AP Solo⢠antenna ⢠ASUS EZ Backup SA T A cables 2 ⢠2-in-1 SA T A power cable ⢠ASUS MP3-In Module Accessories ⢠1 x ASUS Q-Connector set (USB, IEEE 1394a, system panel) - for retail version only ⢠1 x IEEE 1394a port module ⢠2 x SA T A cables ⢠3 x SA T A power cables for six devices ⢠1 x Ultra DMA 133/100/66 cable ⢠1 x IDE cable ⢠1 x FDD cable ⢠1 x 2-port USB 2.0 module ⢠1 x Optional fan ⢠I/O shield Documentation ⢠User guide
1-2 Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 Product highlights Latest processor technology This motherboard supports the latest Intel î Pentium î 4 processors in the LGA775 package. With 1066/ 800 MHz FSB, Hyper-Threading T echnology support, and core-speeds of up to 3.8 �Hz and beyond, Intel î âÂÂs L�A775 Pentium î 4 is among the fastest desktop processors to date. See page 2-7 for details. Intel î Coreâ¢2 Duo/ Intel î Coreâ¢2 Extreme CPU support This motherboard supports the latest powerful and energy efîÂÂcient processors from Intel î . Intel î Coreâ¢2 Duo and Intel î Coreâ¢2 Extreme are based on the Intel î Core⢠Microarchitecture and built on the 65-nanometer (nm) process technology the 65-nanometer (nm) process technology with copper interconnect. Intel Intel î Coreâ¢2 Duo and Intel î Coreâ¢2 Extreme allow users to step up to new levels of gaming experience and multi-tasking performance. Boosting performance is a shared and multi-core optimized L2 cache of 2 MB or 4 MB, guaranteeing enhanced user experience in the digital home and ofîÂÂce. See page 2-7 for details. Intel î 65 nm Dual-Core T echnology CPU support Dual-core processors contain two physical CPU cores with dedicated L2 caches to meet demands for more powerful processing. Intel î âÂÂs 65 nm process is the most advanced chip manufacturing technology , delivering breakthrough performance, enhanced media experience, and low power consumption. Intel î 65nm dual-core processors utilize the latest package technologies for a thinner , lighter design without compromising performance. See page 2-7 for details. Intel î 975X/ICH7R chipset The Intel î 975X Memory Controller Hub (MCH) and the ICH7R I/O controller hub provide the vital interfaces for the motherboard. The Intel î 975X supports up to 8 �B dual-channel DDR2-667/533 MHz, 1066/800 FSB, PCI Express x16 graphics, and dual-core CPU. The MCH supports the Intel î Memory Pipeline T echnology (MPT) that boosts system performance. The Intel î ICH7R Southbridge integrates four Serial A T A ports enabled through the Serial A T A 3 Gb/s RAID controller to ensure data security and enable powerful multi-task processing.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 1-3 A TI Radeon î Xpress 200 CrossFire⢠The A TI Radeon î Xpress 200 CrossFire⢠boosts image quality and rendering speed, eliminating the need to crank down screen resolutions to get high quality images. The chipset allows higher antialiasing, anisotropic îÂÂltering, shading, and texture settings. A TI Radeon î Xpress 200 CrossFire⢠features the A TI Catalyst⢠Control Center that allows you to get real-time 3D-rendered previews of adjustments to your display conîÂÂgurations and advanced 3D settings. See Chapter 6 for details. Intel î Memory Pipeline T echnology (MPT) The Intel î MPT increases system-level and standard operating performance by optimizing memory access between CPU and system memory . Intel î EM64T The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 CPUs with the Intel î EM64T (Extended Memory 64 T echnology). The Intel î EM64T feature allows your computer to run on 64-bit operating systems and access larger amounts of system memory for faster and more efîÂÂcient computing. See the Appendix for details. Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) The Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) intelligently manages the CPU resources by automatically adjusting the CPU voltage and core frequency depending on the CPU loading and system speed or power requirement. See page 4-25 and the Appendix for details. PCI Express⢠interface Th e m oth erb oa rd fu lly s up por ts PCI E xp res s, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI speciîÂÂcations. See page 2-24 for details.
1-4 Chapter 1: Product introduction 8-channel high deîÂÂnition audio Onboard is the Realtek î ALC882M High DeîÂÂnition Audio 8-channel audio CODEC. This CODEC is fully-compliant with Intel î High DeîÂÂnition Audio standard (192 KHz, 24-bit audio). With the CODEC, 8-channel audio ports, and S/PDIF interfaces, you can connect your computer to home theater decoders to produce crystal-clear digital audio. The Realtek î ALC882M CODEC comes with a software application that features jack detection to monitor the plugging status of each jack, impedance sensing to determine audio device classes, and pre-deîÂÂned equalization for various audio devices. See pages 2-28, 2-29, and 5-13 for details. Theater-level audio (designed for Dolby î Master Studio) This motherboard offers theater-level 7.1 surround sound and audio speciîÂÂcations higher than that of DVD. Enjoy true home theatre experience with the following advanced sound technologies: Dolby î Prologic IIx, Dolby î Headphone, Dolby î Virtual Speaker , and Dolby î Digital Live. See page 5-18 for details. IEEE 1394a support The motherboard supports the IEEE 1394a interface that provides high-speed and îÂÂexible PC connectivity to a wide range of peripherals and devices compliant to IEEE 1394a standards. The IEEE 1394a interface allows up to 400 Mbps transfer rates through simple , low-cost, high-bandwidth asynchronous (real-time) data interfacing between computers, peripherals, and consumer electronic devices such as camcorders, VCRs, printers, TVs, and digital cameras. See pages 2-28 and 2-37 for details. S/PDIF digital sound ready The mothe rboard suppo rts t he S/PDIF technology through the S/PDIF interfaces on the rear panel. The S/PDIF technology turns your computer into a high-end entertainment system with digital connectivity to powerful audio and speaker systems. See page 2-30 for details. USB 2.0 technology The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 speciîÂÂcation, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See pages 2-29 and 2-37 for details.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 1-5 Multi-RAID solution Onboard RAID controllers provide the motherboard with multiple RAID functionality that allows you to select the best RAID solution using Serial A T A devices. ⢠ASUS EZ-Backup. Enabled by Silicon ImageâÂÂs SiI4723 controller , ASUS EZ-Backup provides ready-to-go hardware RAID for plug-and play RAID 1 and easy-to-conîÂÂgure RAID 0 sets of two hard disk drives ⢠Intel î ICH7R Southbridge RAID provides RAID level 5 support for three or more hard disk drives. ⢠Cross-RAID allows you to build a RAID 10 set through a cross-conîÂÂguration of ASUS EZ-Backup and Intel î ICH7R. ⢠JMicron î RAID. Enabled by JMicron î JMB363 controller , JMicron î RAID extends the advantages of software RAID beyond internal hard disk drives to an external disk or external, port-multiplier enabled enclosure. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to conîÂÂgure RAID. Dual Gigabit LAN solution The motherboard comes with dual Gigabit LAN controllers to provide the total solution for your networking needs. These network controllers use the PCI Express segment to provide faster data bandwidth for your wired or wireless Internet, LAN, and îÂÂle sharing requirements. See page 2-28 for details.
1-6 Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3.2 ASUS AI Life features Serial A T A I/II technology and SA T A-On-The-Go Th e m oth erb oa rd fu lly s up por ts the Serial A T A II 3.0 Gb/s technology through the Serial A T A interfaces and the Intel î ICH7R MCH. The Serial A T A 3 Gb/s speciîÂÂcation provides twice the bandwidth of the current Serial A T A products with a host of new features, including Nativa Command Queueing (NCQ), and Power Management (PM) Implementation Algorithm. Serial A T A allows for thinner , more îÂÂexible cables with lower pin count and reduced voltage required. Leveraging these Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s features is the SA T A-On-The-Go. Supported by the Jmicron î JMB363 Serial A T A controller are two Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s connectors (one at mid-board and one on the rear panel) provide smart setup, and hot-plug function. See pages 2-29 and 2-34 for details. AI Quiet The ASUS AI Quiet function dynamically controls CPU speed and reduces temperature and fan speeds, thus minimizing noise and ensuring quiet operation. See page 4-35 for details. ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 is a fan-less and zero-noise cooling solution that lowers the temperature of critical heat generating components by 20úC. The motherboard uses a special design on the printed circuit board (PCB) to dissipate heat that critical components generate. See page 2-3 for details. 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System⢠(NOS) is a technology that auto-detects the CPU loading and dynamically overclocks the CPU speed only when needed. See page 4-21 for details.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 1-7 AI NET2 AI NET2 is a BIOS-based diagnostic tool that detects and reports Ethernet cable faults and shorts. With this utility , you can easily monitor the condition of the Ethernet cable connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port. During the bootup process, AI NET2 immediately diagnoses the LAN cable and reports shorts and faults up to 100 meters at 1 meter accuracy . See pages 4-22 and 5-12 for details. 8-Phase Power Design The ASUS 8-Phase Power Design prolongs CPU lifespan and keeps the system stable by preventing high power stress to the CPU and power supply module. The design ensures high efîÂÂciency operation to generate less heat compared with conventional power solutions, thus achieving cool system environment and making this motherboard ideal for overclocking. Fanless Design and Heat-pipe The ASUS fanless design allows multi-directional heat îÂÂow from major thermal sources in the motherboard to lower overall system temperature, resulting in quieter operation and longer system life. ASUS has devoted special efforts to address the thermal issues across the motherboard, and most notably in the following areas: CPU, power , VGA, Northbridge and Southbridge. The heat pipe, heatsink, and strategic board layout were tailor made to dissipate heat in the most efîÂÂcient manner . ASUS exclusive two-slot thermal design ASUS two-slot thermal design provides better air-îÂÂow and lower V�A cards temperature than other bransâ one-slot design, which also ensures better system stability and longer component life cycle. Precision T weaker This feature allows you to îÂÂne-tune the CPU/memory voltage and gradually increase the Front Side Bus (FSB) and PCI Express frequency to achieve maximum system performance. PEG Link Mode This feature enhances your PCI Express graphics card performance by allowing the motherboard to automatically adjust the PCI Express graphics link mode to the correct frequency based on the system conîÂÂguration. Four additional settings are available for overclocking the PEG Link Mode. See page 4-27 for details.
1-8 Chapter 1: Product introduction ASUS Hyper Path 3 This feature signiîÂÂcantly shortens latency time during data transfers, allowing users to experience the real power of their computers. See page 4-27 for details. CrashFree BIOS 3 Th e A SUS Cr as hF ree BI OS 3 al low s u se rs to re st or e c orr upt ed B IOS da ta fr om a US B î ash di sk c ont ain in g the BI OS îÂÂl e. Th is ut il ity sa ves u se rs the co st an d h ass le of bu yin g a re pl ac eme nt BI OS ch ip.S ee pa ge 4-9 for details. ASUS EZ Flash 2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 is a user-friendly BIOS update utility . Simply press the predeîÂÂned hotkey to launch the utility and update the BIOS without entering the OS. Update your BIOS easily without preparing a bootable diskette or using an OS-based îÂÂash utility . See page 4-5 for details. ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology The ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efîÂÂcient operation. See page 4- 36 for details. ASUS Multi-language BIOS The multi-language BIOS allows you to select the language of your choice from the available options. The localized BIOS menus allow easier and faster conîÂÂguration. See page 4-13 for details. ASUS MyLogo 2 ASUS My Logo 2 is the new feature present in the motherboard that allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable and animated boot logos. See pages 4-40 and 5-10 for details. ASUS Music Alarm W ake up to the music of your choice instead of the irritating sound of an alarm clock. The ASUS Music Alarm gives you a personal wake-up call with your favorite CD music without having to enter the OS. See page 4-43 and 5-26 for details. ASUS Q-Connector Y ou can use ASUS Q-Connector to connect/disconnect chassis front panel cables by only a few easy steps. See pages 2-43 for details.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 1-9 1.3.4 Digital Home features ASUS WiFi-AP Solo⢠WiFi AP Solo⢠allows a new level of versitility for your PC, enabling it to create a complete wireless home network in either AP or wirelesss client mode. Users will be able to play LAN games, connecting to the Internet, access and share printers, and use Skype from anywhere within range. WiFi-AP Solo⢠can provide these functions even when the PC is in sleep mode, so users can use Skype as a true replacement for tradition long distance telephone service. WiFi-AP Solo⢠is an on-board feature, which means that users will save the extra WiFi-AP cost. (Refer to the ASUS Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠user guide for details.) ASUS DH Remote⢠DH Remote⢠is a convenient PC remote controller that gives users unprecedented control over their PCs from the comfort of their couches. With the touch of a button, users can instantly operate the following functions: (Refer to the (Refer to the ASUS DH Remote⢠user guide for details.) Power: T urns the computer on/off. Quick Power: Puts the computer quickly into sleep mode. Noise Off: Reduces the noise coming from the computer . EZ WiFi: Puts the computer quickly into sleep mode but allowing WiFi-AP Solo⢠to still operate. Full Screen: Puts the media application into full screen. AP Launch: Launches the media application. Media Control Zone: Controls the media application. ASUS MP3-In⢠A convenient interface between computers and MP3 players, the ASUS MP3-In⢠features enables MP3 players to connect to PC speakers even when the PC power is off, which means that users can enjoy the sound quality from PC speakers without additional stereo equipment cost. (Refer to the ASUS MP3-In⢠quick (Refer to the ASUS MP3-In⢠quick installation guide for details.)
1-10 Chapter 1: Product introduction ASUS EZ Backup⢠ASUS EZ Backup requires no driver or BIOS conîÂÂguration. ASUS EZ Backup offers plug and play RAID to backup your data instantaneously . Exclusive to ASUS and the îÂÂrst of its kind in the world, EZ Backup allows users to utilize SA T A2 technology to build RAID 1 (default) or RAID 0 without requiring any BIOS setup or any other conîÂÂguration. ASUS EZ Backup is ideal for anyone who wants to secure data on the hard drive but does not want the hassle of complicated software conîÂÂguration. See section âÂÂ5.4.4 Silicon Image î RAID conîÂÂgurationâ for details.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................... 2-7 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-14 2.5 Expansion slots .......................................................................... 2-22 2.6 Jumpers ...................................................................................... 2-26 2.7 Connectors ................................................................................. 2-28
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-1 Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2.1 Before you proceed T ake note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity . ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the A TX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply . Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Onboard LED SB_PWR ON Standby Power OFF Powered Off
2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information P5W DH DELUXE î 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the conîÂÂguration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard îÂÂts into it. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. 2.2.1 Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below . 2.2.2 Screw holes Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Place this side towards the rear of the chassis
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-3 2.2.3 ASUS Stack Cool 2 The motherboard comes with the ASUS Stack Cool 2 cooling solution that lowers the temperature of critical heat generating components by 20úC. The motherboard uses a special design on the printed circuit board (PCB) to dissipate heat that critical components generate.
2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.4 Motherboard layout P ANEL P5W DH DELUXE î AAFP CHASSIS 24.5cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in) CPU_FAN DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) CHA_FAN2 FLOPPY Super I/O 8Mb BIOS TSB43AB22A CD PCIEX1_1 PCIEX16_2 CLRTC SA TA_RAID1 Intel î ICH7R SB_PWR EA TXPWR PRI_IDE CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power Intel î MCH 975X PCI1 USB56 LAN2_USB12 PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: K eyboard LAN1_USB34 AUDIO PCIEX1_2 PCIEX16_1 PCI2 PC I3 MP3IN ALC 882M 88E8053 88E8053 PWR_FAN1 PWR_FAN2 JMicron JMB363 SPDIF_OUT USB78_WFG USB9 LGA775 ESA TA_1394 A TX12V GL850A Silicon Image Sil4723 RAID_SEL SA T A4 CHA_FAN1 IE1394_1 USB78 SPDIF_O1 SPDIF_O2 COM1 EZ_RAID2 EZ_RAID1 SA T A1 PRI_EIDE SA T A3 ADH
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-5 2.2.5 Layout contents Slots Page 1. DDR2 DIMM slots 2-14 2. PCI slots 2-24 3. PCI Express x1 slot 2-24 4. PCI Express x16 slots 2-24 Jumpers Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLRTC) 2-26 2. ASUS EZ-Backup RAID mode selection (RAID_SEL) 2-27 Rear panel connectors Page 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-28 2. Serial port 2-28 3. IEEE 1394a port 2-28 4. LAN1 (RJ-45) port 2-28 5. LAN2 (RJ-45) port 2-28 6. Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange) 2-28 7. Rear Speaker Out port (black) 2-28 8. Line In port (light blue) 2-29 9. Line Out port (lime) 2-29 10. Microphone port (pink) 2-29 1 1. Side Speaker Out port (gray) 2-29 12. USB 2.0 ports 1,2, 3, and 4 2-29 13. External SA T A port 2-29 14. Optical S/PDIF Out port 2-30 15. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 2-30 16. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-30 17. Antenna jack 2-30 18. ASUS Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠LED indicator 2-30
2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information Internal connectors Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) 2-31 2. JMicron î IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [black]) 2-31 3. Intel î ICH7R IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) 2-32 4. Intel î ICH7R Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1 [red], SA T A3 [black], SA T A4 [black],) 2-33 5. JMicron î JMB363 Serial A T A connector (7-pin SA T A_RAID1 [red]) 2-34 6. ASUS EZ-Backup Serial A T A connectors (7-pin EZ_RAID1 [orange], EZ_RAID2 [orange]) 2-35 7. MP3-In connector (4-pin MP3IN) 2-35 8. Internal audio connector (4-pin CD) 2-36 9. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 2-36 10. USB connector (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) 2-37 1 1. IEEE 1394a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1 [Red]) 2-37 12. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) 2-38 13. CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 3-pin PWR_F AN1, 3-pin PWR_F AN2, 3-pin CHA_F AN1, 3-pin CHA_F AN2) 2-38 14. ATX po wer co nne cto rs (24-pin EA TXPWR, 4-pin A TX12V) 2-40 15. System panel connector (20-pin P ANEL) ⢠System power LED (2-pin PLED) ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) ⢠System warning speaker (4-pin SPEAKER) ⢠A TX power button/soft-off button (2-pin PWRSW) ⢠Reset button (2-pin RESET) 2-42
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-7 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î 4/Celeron î/ Intel î Pentium î D and the Intel î next generation 65 nm Intel Intel î Coreâ¢2 Duo and Intel Intel î Coreâ¢2 Extreme multi-core processor in the processor in the 775-land package. This motherboard also supports the Intel î Pentium î Processor Extreme Edition, the latest CPU with embedded dual physical cores and Hyper-Threading technology , making four CPU threads possible. Refer to the table below for the operating system support status. ⢠If installing a dual-core CPU, connect the chassis fan cable to the PWR_F AN1/2 or CHA_F AN1/2 connector to ensure system stability . ⢠Install a chassis fan with at least a speed of 2400 rpm and 8 CFM turnrate when using a dual-core CPU to ensure system stability . Overheating can permanently damage the system and/or CPU. ⢠Install an additional chassis fan to ensure better air îÂÂow when overclocking. ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the PnP cap is on the socket and the socket contacts are not bent. Contact your retailer immediately if the PnP cap is missing, or if you see any damage to the PnP cap/socket contacts/motherboard components. ASUS will shoulder the cost of repair only if the damage is shipment/transit-related. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA775 socket. ⢠The product warranty does not cover damage to the socket contacts resulting from incorrect CPU installation/removal, or misplacement/loss/ incorrect removal of the PnP cap. OS licensing support list Intel î Dual-Core CPU support Intel î Dual-Core CPU and Hyper-Threading T echnology support Windows î 2000 Professional Windows î 2000 Advanced Server Windows î 2000 Advanced Server Windows î XP Home Windows î XP Home Windows î XP Professional Windows î XP Professional Windows î Server 2003 - Standard, Enterprise Windows î Server 2003 - Standard, Enterprise
2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135ú angle. 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. Retention tab Load lever This side of the socket box should face you. PnP cap A B T o prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU. 2.3.1 Installing the CPU T o install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. Before installing the CPU, make sure that the cam box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE CPU Socket 775
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-9 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket then îÂÂt the socket alignment key into the CPU notch. Alignment key Gold triangle mark 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. 7. If installing a dual-core CPU, connect the chassis fan cable to the PWR_F AN1/2 or CHA_F AN1/2 connector to ensure system stability . A B The CPU îÂÂts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with the Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 T echnology (EM64T), Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST), and Hyper-Threading T echnology . Refer to the Appendix for more information on these CPU features. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreîÂÂnger to a 100ú angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). Load plate A B CPU notch
2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information Fastener Motherboard hole 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan The Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. T o install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four fasteners match the holes on the motherboard. ⢠When you buy a boxed Intel î Pentium î 4 processor , the package includes the CPU fan and heatsink assembly . If you buy a CPU separately , make sure that you use only Intel î -certiîÂÂed multi-directional heatsink and fan. ⢠Y our Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 heatsink and fan assembly comes in a push-pin design and requires no tool to install. ⢠If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly , make sure that you have properly applied Thermal Interface Material to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly . Make sure that you have installed the motherboard to the chassis before you install the CPU fan and heatsink assembly . Make sure to orient each fastener with the narrow end of the groove pointing outward. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) Orient the heatsink and fan assembly such that the CPU fan cable is closest to the CPU fan connector . Narrow end of the groove
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-11 3. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_F AN. 2. Push down two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to secure the heatsink and fan assembly in place. B B A A A A B B Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector . P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE CPU fan connector CPU_F AN GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM
2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan T o uninstall the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Disconnect the CPU fan cable from the connector on the motherboard. 2. Rotate each fastener counterclockwise. 3. Pull up two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to disengage the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard. B B A A A A B B 4. Carefully remove the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-13 5. Rotate each fastener clockwise to ensure correct orientation when reinstalling. The narrow end of the groove should point outward after resetting. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) Narrow end of the groove Refer to the documentation in the boxed or stand-alone CPU fan package for detailed information on CPU fan installation.
2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. DDR2 DIMMs are notched differently to prevent installation on a DDR DIMM socket. The îÂÂgure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: Channel Sockets Channel A DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 Channel B DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 2.4.2 Memory conîÂÂgurations Y ou may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, and 2 GB unbuffered ECC/non-ECC DDR2 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠For dual-channel conîÂÂguration, the total size of memory module(s) installed per channel must be the same (DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2 = DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2). ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency . For optimum compatibility , it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) for the latest QualiîÂÂed V endors List. ⢠For dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration, install the DIMMs in slots DIMM_B1 and DIMM_A1 (orange slots); install another pair of DIMMs in slots DIMM_B2 and DIMM_A2 (black slots). P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE 240-pin DDR2 DIMM sockets DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-15 Notes on memory limitations ⢠Due to chipset limitation, this motherboard can only support up to 8 GB on the operating systems listed below . Y ou may install a maximum of 2 GB DIMMs on each slot. ⢠Some old-version DDR2-667 DIMMs may not match Intel î âÂÂs On-Die-T ermination (ODT) requirement and will automatically downgrade to run at DDR2-533. If this happens, contact your memory vendor to check the ODT value. ⢠Due to chipset limitation, DDR2-667 with CL=4 will be downgraded to run at DDR2-533 by default setting. If you want to operate with lower latency , adjust the memory timing manually . ⢠Due to chipset limitation, DDR2-533 with CL=3 will be downgraded to run at DDR2-400 by default setting. If you want to operate with lower latency , adjust the memory timing manually . Important notice on installing Windows î XP 32-bit version If you install Windows î XP 32-bit version Operating System (OS), the limitation of this OS version is that it may reserve a certain amount of memory space for system devices. We recommend that you install less than 3 GB system memory if you would like to work under Windows î XP 32-bit version OS. The excess memory installation will not cause any usage problem, but it will not give users the beneîÂÂt of manipulating this excess memory space. Visit the ASUS F AQ site for further explanation: http://support.asus.com/faq/faq. aspx?SLanguage=en-us Under General Search, make the selections as shown, then click Search. Click the article titled â 4GB memory installed but less memory size detected. â Y ou also may check the URLs below for third party comments on this issue: http://dlsvr01.asus.com/pub/ASUS/mb/4GB_Rev1.pdf http:/ /www.i ntel.co m/supp ort/mot herboa rds/se rver /sb/cs -016594 .htm 32-bit 64-bit Windows î 2000 Advanced Server Windows î Server 2003 Enterprise Edition Windows î Server 2003 Standard x64 Edition Windows î XP Professional x64 Enterprise Edition Windows î Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition
2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information QualiîÂÂed V endors Lists DDR2-800 Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2-800 with lower latency QualiîÂÂed V endors List. Size V endor Chip No. Chip brand Side(s) Part No. CL DIMM socket support (Optional) A* B* C* 512 MB KINGSTON Heat-Sink Package â SS KHX6400D2/512 â â¢ ⢠512 MB KINGSTON K4T51083QC â SS KVR800D2N5/512 â 1024 MB KINGSTON K4T51083QC â DS KVR800D2N5/1G â â¢ ⢠256 MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE7 â SS M378T3253FZ3-CE7 â â¢ ⢠256 MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE7(ECC) â SS M391T3253FZ3-CE7 â 512 MB SAMSUNG EDD339XX â SS M378T6553CZ3-CE7 â â¢ ⢠512 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T256800AF25 â DS HYS64T64520HU-2.5-A â â¢ ⢠⢠512 MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-S6 â SS HYMP564U64AP8-S6 â 1024 MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-S6 â DS HYMP512U64AP8-S6 â 512 MB MICRON 5JAIIZ9DQQ â SS MT8HTF6464A Y-80EA3 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB MICRON 5JAIIZ9DQQ â DS MT16HTF12864A Y-80EA3 â â¢ ⢠⢠512 MB CORSAIR Heat-Sink Package â SS CM2X512A-6400 â 1024 MB CORSAIR Heat-Sink Package â DS CM2X1024-6400PRO â â¢ ⢠⢠256 MB A-DA TA E2508AB-GE-E â SS M20EL6F3G3170A1D0Z â â¢ ⢠256 MB A-DA TA E2508AB-GE-E â SS M20EL6F3G3160A1D0Z â 256 MB A-DA TA E2508AB-GE-E â SS M2OEL6F3G3160A1D0Z â â¢ 512 MB A-DA TA E2508AB-GE-E â DS M2OEL6F3H4170A1D0Z â 256 MB Apacer E2508AB-GE-E â SS 78.81091.420 â â¢ ⢠512 MB Apacer E2508AB-GE-E â DS 78.91091.420 â 512 MB Crucial Heat-Sink Package â SS BL6464AA804.8FA â 1024 MB Crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL12864AA804.16F A â â¢ 256 MB T winMOS E2508AB-GE-E â SS 8G-24IK2-EBT â 512 MB OCZ Heat-Sink Package â SS OCZ28001024EBDCPE-K â 512 MB Elixir N2TU51280AE-25C â SS M2Y51264TU88A2B-25C â 512 MB NANY A NT5TU64M8AE-25C â SS NT512T64U88A1BY -25C â 512 MB NANY A NT5TU64M8BE-25C â SS NT512T64U88B0BY -25C â 1024 MB NANYA NT5TU64M8BE-25C â DS NT1GT64U8HB0BY -25C â Side(s): SS - Single-sided DS - Double-sided DIMM support: A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory conîÂÂguration. B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either the orange slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration. C - Supports two pairs of modules inserted into both the orange and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-17 Size V endor Chip No. Chip brand Side(s) Part No. CL DIMM socket support (Optional) A* B* C* 512MB KINGSTON E5108AE-6E-E â SS Kâ¢R667D2N5/512 â â¢ ⢠1024MB KINGSTON E5108AE-6E-E â DS Kâ¢R667D2N5/1G â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB KINGSTON E5108AE-6E-E â SS Kâ¢R667D2E5/512 â â¢ ⢠⢠256MB KINGSTON HYB18T256800AF3 â SS Kâ¢R667D2N5/256 â â¢ ⢠⢠256MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE6 â SS M378T3253FZ0-CE6 â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE6 â DS M378T6453FZ0-CE6 â â¢ ⢠⢠256MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE6(ECC) â SS M391T3253FZ0-CE6 â â¢ ⢠512MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE6(ECC) â DS M391T6453FZ0-CE6 â â¢ 256MB SAMSUNG K4T51 163QC-ZCE6 â SS M378T3354CZ0-CE6 â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG ZCE6K4T51083QC â SS M378T6553CZ0-CE6 â â¢ 1024MB SAMSUNG ZCE6K4T51083QC â DS M378T2953CZ0-CE6 â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB MICRON 4â¢B41D9CZM â DS MT16HTF6464A Y -667B4 â â¢ ⢠256MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512160AF-3S â SS HYS64T32000HU-3S-A â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3S â SS HYS64T64000HU-3S-A â â¢ ⢠1024MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3S â DS HYS64T128020HU-3S-A â â¢ ⢠⢠256MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T256800AF3S(ECC) â SS HYS72T32000HU-3S-A â â¢ ⢠512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3S(ECC) â SS HYS72T64000HU-3S-A â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3S(ECC) â DS HYS72T128020HU-3S-A â â¢ ⢠512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y5 â SS HYMP564U64AP8-Y5 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y5 â DS HYMP512U64AP8-Y5 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HY5PS1G831FP-Y5(ECC) â SS HYMP1 12U72P8-Y5 â â¢ 512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y5(ECC) â SS HYMP564U72AP8-Y5 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y5(ECC) â DS HYMP512U72AP8-Y5 â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y4 â SS HYMP564U64AP8-Y4 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y4 â DS HYMP512U64AP8-Y4 â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y4(ECC) â SS HYMP564U72AP8-Y4 â â¢ ⢠1024MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y4(ECC) â DS HYMP512U72AP8-Y4 â â¢ ⢠256MB ELPIDA E2508AB-6E-E â SS EBE25UC8ABF A-6E-E â â¢ ⢠512MB ELPIDA E5108AE-6E-E â SS EBE51UD8AEF A-6E-E â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB ELPIDA Engineering Sample â DS EBE1 1UD8AEFA-6E-E â â¢ ⢠512MB crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL6464AA664.16FB â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL12864AA664.16F A â â¢ ⢠512MB crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL6464AL664.16FB â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL12864AL664.16F A â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL6464AA663.8FA â â¢ 1024MB crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL12864AA663.16F A â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB Kingmax E5108AE-6E-E â SS KLCC28F-A8EB5 â â¢ ⢠1024MB Kingmax E5108AE-6E-E â DS KLCD48F-A8EB5 â â¢ ⢠512MB Apacer E5108AE-6E-E â SS 78.91092.420 â â¢ 1024MB Apacer E5108AE-6E-E â DS 78.01092.420 â 512MB A-DAT A E5108AE-6E-E â SS M20EL5G3H3160B1C0Z â â¢ 512MB TwinMOS E5108AE-GE-E â SS 8G-25JK5-EBT â 512MB GEIL Heat-Sink Package â SS GX21GB5300UDC â DDR2-667 (continued on the next page)
2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information Size Vendor Chip No. Chip brand Side(s) Part No. CL DIMM socket support (Optional) A* B* C* 512MB GEIL Heat-Sink Package â SS GX21GB5300DC â 256MB NANY A NT5TU32M16AG-3C â SS NT256T64UH4A0FY-3C â 512MB NANY A NT5TU64M8AE-3C â SS NT512T64U88A0BY -3C â 512MB NANY A NT5TU64M8BE-3B â SS NT512T64U88B0BY -3C â 1024MB NANY A NT5TU64M8BE-3B â DS NT1GT64U8HB0BY -3C â 512MB Elixir N2TU51280AF-3C â SS M2U51264TU88A0F-3C â 1024MB Elixir N2TU51280AF-3C â DS M2U1G64TU8HA2F-3C â 512MB OCZ Heat-Sink Package â SS OCZ26671024EBDCPE-K â 1024MB OCZ Heat-Sink Package â DS OCZ26672048EBDCPE-K â 1024MB PQI E5108AE-5C-E â DS MEAD-403LA â 512MB WINTEC 4UAI2D9CRZ â SS 39127282 â 1024MB WINTEC 4W AIID9CWX â DS 39137282 â 512MB MDT 18D51280D-30518 â SS M512-667-8 â 1024MB MDT 18D51280D-30528 â DS M924-667-16 â 512MB Kingbox DD2640800-667 â SS â â 1024MB Kingbox DD2640800-667 â DS â â Side(s): SS - Single-sided DS - Double-sided DIMM support: A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory conîÂÂguration. B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either the orange slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration. C - Supports two pairs of modules inserted into both the orange and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration. Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2-667 with lower latency QualiîÂÂed V endors List. DDR2-667
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-19 (continued on the next page) Size V endor Chip No. Chip brand Side(s) Part No. CL DIMM socket support (Optional) A* B* C* 256 MB KINGSTON E51 16AF-5C-E â SS KVR533D2N4/256 â 512 MB KINGSTON HYB18T512800AF37 â SS KVR533D2N4/512 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB KINGSTON 5YDIID9GCT â DS KVR533D2N4/1G â â¢ ⢠⢠512 MB SAMSUNG K4T51083QB-GCD5 â SS M378T6553BG0-CD5 â â¢ 256 MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-GCD5 â SS M378T3253FG0-CD5 â â¢ ⢠512 MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-GCD5 â DS M378T6453FG0-CD5 â 512 MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-GCD5(ECC) â DS M391T6453FG0-CD5 â â¢ 1024 MB SAMSUNG K4T51083QB-GCD5(ECC) â DS M391T2953BG0-CD5 â â¢ 256 MB MICRON 4DBIIZ9BQT â SS N/A â â¢ ⢠512 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3(ECC) â SS HYS72T64000HU-3.7-A â 512 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AC37 â SS HYS64T64000GU-3.7-A â â¢ ⢠⢠256 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512160AF-3.7 â SS HYS64T32000HU-3.7-A â â¢ ⢠⢠512 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF37 â SS HYS64T64000HU-3.7-A â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF37 â DS HYS64T128020HU-3.7-A â â¢ ⢠⢠2048 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T1G800AF-3.7 â DS HYS64T256020HU-3.7-A â 256 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T5121608BF-3.7 â SS HYS64T32000HU-3.7-B â â¢ ⢠512 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800BF37 â SS HYS64T64000HU-3.7-B â â¢ ⢠1024 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800BF37 â DS HYS64T128020HU-3.7-B â 512 MB Hynix HY5PS12821F-C4 â SS HYMP564U648-C4 â â¢ ⢠512 MB Hynix HY5PS12821F-C4(ECC) â SS HYMP564U728-C4 â 1024 MB Hynix HY5PS12821F-C4 â DS HYMP512U648-C4 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix HY5PS12821F-C4(ECC) â DS HYMP512U728-C4 â â¢ ⢠1024 MB Hynix HY5PS12821F-E3(ECC) â DS HYMP512U728-C4 â 512 MB Hynix HY5PS12821FP-C4(ECC) â SS HYMP564U728-C4 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix HY5PS12821FP-C4 â DS HYMP512U648-C4 â 512 MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-C3 â SS HYMP564U64AP8-C3 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-C3 â DS HYMP512U64AP8-C3 â â¢ 512 MB ELPIDA E5108AB-5C-E(ECC) â SS EBE51ED8ABFA-5C-E â â¢ ⢠⢠512 MB ELPIDA E5108AB-5C-E â SS EBE51UD8ABF A-5C â â¢ ⢠512 MB ELPIDA E5108AB-5C-E â SS EBE51UD8ABF A-5C-E â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB ELPIDA E5108AB-5C-E â DS EBE1 1UD8ABFA-5C-E â 2048 MB ELPIDA E1 108AA-5C-E â DS EBE21EE8AAFA-5C-E â 256 MB CORSAIR MIII0051832M8CEC â SS VS256MB533D2 â 512 MB CORSAIR MI1 10052432M8CEC â DS VS512MB533D2 â 256 MB Apacer E51 16AB-5C-E â SS 78.81077.420 â â¢ ⢠⢠256 MB KINGMAX E5116AB-5C-E â SS KLBB68F-36EP4 â â¢ ⢠512 MB KINGMAX E5108AE-5C-E â SS KLBC28F-A8EB4 â â¢ 1024 MB KINGMAX E5108AE-5C-E â DS KLBD48F-A8EB4 â â¢ ⢠512 MB KINGMAX KKEA88E4AAK-37 â SS KLBC28F-A8KE4 â â¢ ⢠1024 MB KINGMAX 5MB22D9DCN â DS KLBD48F-A8ME4 â â¢ 512 MB Transcend K4T51083QB-GCD5 â SS TS64MLQ64V5J â â¢ 1024 MB Transcend K4T51083QB-GCD5 â DS TS128MLQ64V5J â â¢ ⢠256 MB CENTURY K4T56083QF-GCD5 â SS 25V6S8SSD5F4-K43 â 512 MB CENTURY E5108AB-5C-E â SS 25V2H8EL5CB4-J43 â 1024 MB CENTURY E5108AB-5C-E â DS 25V0H8EL5CB4-J45 â 1024 MB CENTURY E5108AB-5C-E â DS 25VOH8EL5C â 256 MB elixir N2TU51216AF-37B â SS M2U25664TUH4A0F-37B â 512 MB elixir N2TU51280AF-37B â SS M2U51264TU88A0F-37B â 256 MB Aeneon AET960UD00-37C88X â SS AET560UD00-370A98X â DDR2-533
2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information Size V endor Chip No. Model Side(s) Part No. CL DIMM socket support (Optional) A* B* C* 512 MB Aeneon AET960UD00-37C88X â SS AET660UD00-370A98X â 512 MB Aeneon AET93F370AG0513 â SS AET660UD00-370A98X â 256 MB Aeneon AET94F370A â SS AET560UD00-370A98Z â 256 MB Aeneon AET94F370A â SS AET560UD00-370A98X â 512 MB Aeneon AET93F370A â SS AET660UD00-370A98Z â 512 MB Aeneon AET93F370A â SS AET660UD00-370A98X â 512 MB Aeneon AET93F370 â SS AET660UD00-370A98X â 1024 MB Aeneon AET93F370A â DS AET760UD00-370A98X â 256 MB NANY A NT5TU32M16AF-37B â SS NT256T64UH4A0F-37B â 512 MB NANY A NT5TU64M8AF-37B â SS NT512T64U88A0F-37B â 512 MB NANY A NT5TU64M8AF-37B(ECC) â SS NT512T72U89A0F-37B â 1024 MB NANY A NT5TU64M8AF-37B â DS NT1GT64U8HA0F-37B â 1024 MB PQI 64MX8D2-E â DS MEAB-323LA â 512 MB PQI 64MX8D2-E â SS MEAB-423LA â 512 MB T winMOS K4T51083QB-GCD5 â SS 8D-22JB5-K2T â 256 MB SimpleT ech 858S032F25A â SS SVM-42DR2/256 â 512 MB SimpleT ech 858S064F25A â SS SVM-42DR2/512 â 1024 MB Patriot Heat-Sink Package â SS PDC21G5600 XBLK â 512 MB MDT 18D51280D-3.70S20 â SS M512-533-8 â 1024 MB MDT 18D51280D-3.70448 â DS M924-533-16 â DDR2-533 Side(s): SS - Single-sided DS - Double-sided DIMM support: A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory conîÂÂguration. B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either the orange slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration. C - Supports two pairs of modules inserted into both the orange and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration. Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2-533 with lower latency QualiîÂÂed V endors List.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-21 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. T o install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM T o remove a DIMM: 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it îÂÂts in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. Do not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Support the DIMM lightly with your îÂÂngers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it îÂÂips out with extra force. Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 3 2 DDR2 DIMM notch 1 1
2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card T o install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press îÂÂrmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier . 6. Replace the system cover . 2.5.2 ConîÂÂguring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, conîÂÂgure the it by adjusting the software settings. 1. T urn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any . See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âÂÂShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conîÂÂicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. Refer to the table on the next page for details.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-23 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. IRQ assignments for this motherboard A B C D E F G H PCI slot 1 â â â â shared â â PCI slot 2 â â â â â â shared â PCI slot 3 â â â â â â â shared Onboard IDE (JMicron î ) â shared â â â â â â Onboard 1394 â â â â â shared â â Onboard LAN1 â â â shared â â â â Onboard LAN2 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x16 1 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x16 2 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x1 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x1 â â shared â â â â â USB controller 1 â â â â shared â â â USB controller 2 â shared â â â â â â USB controller 3 â â shared â â â â â USB controller 4 â â â shared â â â â USB 2.0 controller â â â â shared â â â Serial A T A â â â â â â â shared IDE â â â â â â shared â HD Audio â â â shared â â â â IRQ Priority Standard function 0 1 System T imer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Redirect to IRQ#9 3 1 1 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 4 12 Communications Port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7 15 Printer Port (LPT1)* 8 6 System CMOS/Real T ime Clock 9 4 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 10 5 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 1 1 6 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 12 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port* 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel
2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.4 PCI slots The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI speciîÂÂcations. The îÂÂgure shows a LAN card installed on a PCI slot. 2.5.5 PCI Express x1 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x1 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Express speciîÂÂcations. The following îÂÂgure shows a network card installed on the PCI Express x1 slot. 2.5.6 T wo PCI Express x16 slots This motherboard supports two A TI CrossFire⢠PCI Express x16 graphics cards that comply with the PCI Express speciîÂÂcations. The îÂÂgure shows two graphics cards installed on the PCI Express x16 slots. See Chapter 6 for details on the CrossFire⢠technology feature.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-25 ⢠We recommend that you install a graphics card on the primary (orange) PCI Express slot and install other PCI Express devices on the black PCI PCI Express x16 slot. . ⢠In CrossFire⢠mode, each PCI Express x16 slot works at x8 bandwidth. ⢠In CrossFire⢠mode, install the A TI CrossFire⢠Edition (Master) graphics card on the primary (orange) PCI Express slot. ⢠Refer to the table below for possible PCI Express Card conîÂÂgurations. * Install two A TI graphics cards from the same GPU family that support CrossFire⢠mode. ** The speed of the primary PCIe x16 slot (PCIEX16_1) changes to x8 mode after you install any device in the secondary PCIe x16 (PCIEX16_2) slot. PCI Express x16 slot conîÂÂgurations PCIEX16_1 (orange) slot PCIEX16_2 (black) slot Card type Speed Card type Speed Non-CrossFire⢠mode PCIe x16 graphics card x16 NA NA PCIe x16 graphics card x8 Other PCIe x16 graphics card x8** (dual screen) PCIe x16 graphics card x8 Other PCIe card x8, x4, x1** Dual graphics cards in CrossFire⢠mode* A TI î CrossFire⢠Edition graphics card x8 A TI graphics card x8
2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.6 Jumpers 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. T o erase the RTC RAM: 1. T urn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery . 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Reinstall the battery . 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. Y ou do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLR TC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Clear RTC RAM CLRTC Normal Clear RTC (Default) 1 2 2 3
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-27 2. ASUS EZ-Backup RAID mode selection (RAID_SEL) This jumper allows you to select the ASUS EZ-Backup RAID mode. Keeping the default setting RAID 1 allows you to build a RAID 1 set without any jumper or BIOS setting. Install the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager utility from the support CD and install two Serial A T A hard disk drives on the EZ_RAID1 and EZ_RAID2 connectors on the motherboard, and you are ready to mirror your data. For detailed information about ASUS EZ-Backup, see section âÂÂ5.4.4 Silicon Image î RAID conîÂÂguration.â P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE RAID Setting RA ID _S EL RAID1 (Default) 1 BIG mode 1 [Fast mode] 1 RAID0 [Safe mode]
2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.7 Connectors 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors 1. PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. Serial port. This 9-pin COM1 port is for pointing devices or other serial devices. 3. IEEE 1394a port. The 6-pin IEEE 1394a port provides high-speed connectivity for audio/video devices, storage peripherals, PCs, or portable devices. 4. LAN1 (RJ-45) port. This Marvell î LAN port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 5. LAN2 (RJ-45) port. This Marvell î LAN port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. LAN port Activity/Link Speed LED Status Description Status Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection ORANGE Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection LAN port LED indications SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED 6. Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). This port connects the center/ subwoofer speakers. 7. Rear Speaker Out port (black). This port connects the rear speakers in a 4/8-channel audio conîÂÂguration, and the side speakers in a 6-channel conîÂÂguration. 1 16 4 2 3 5 6 12 10 18 1 1 13 14 15 8 9 7 17
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-29 Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel conîÂÂguration Refer to the audio conîÂÂguration table below for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel conîÂÂguration. Port Headset 2-channel 4-channel 6-channel 8-channel Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Gray â â â Side Speaker Out Black â Rear Speaker Out Side Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Orange â â Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer 8. Line In port (light blue). This port connects a tape, CD, DVD player , or other audio sources. 9. Line Out port (lime). This port connects a headphone or a speaker . In 4-channel, 6-channel, and 8-channel conîÂÂguration, the function of this port becomes Front Speaker Out. 10. Microphone port (pink). This port connects a microphone. 1 1. Side Speaker Out port (gray). This port connects the side speakers in an 8-channel audio conîÂÂguration. 12. USB 2.0 ports 1, 2, 3 and 4. These 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 support S5 wake-up by USB. For the location of these ports, see page 2-4. 13. External SA T A port. This port connects to an external SA T A box or a Serial A T A port multiplier . The external SA T A port supports external Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s devices. Longer cables support higher power requirements to deliver signal up to two meters away , and enables improved hot-swap function.
2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information The following items are only for the optional Wireless LAN module. 17. ASUS Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠LED indicator . The ASUS Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠comes with a green data transmission LED (AIR). For more information, refer to the ASUS Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠user guide. 18. Antenna jack. This jack is on the onboard wireless LAN module that allows you to set up a wireless network and exchange information with other wireless devices without tangling cables and wires. Connect the moveable omni-directional antenna to this jack. 14. Optical S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device This port connects an external audio output device via an optical S/PDIF cable. . 15. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via a coaxial S/PDIF cable. 16. PS/2 keyboard port (purple). This port is for a PS/2 keyboard.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-31 This connector does not support A T API devices. 2. JMicron î IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [black]) This connector is for Ultra A T A 133/100/66 signal cables. The JMicron î IDE connector supports up to two IDE hard disk drives for easier data storage. 2.7.2 Internal connectors 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) This connector is for the provided îÂÂoppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector , then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the îÂÂoppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Floppy disk drive connector NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN 1 FLOPPY P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_EIDE P IN 1
2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Intel î ICH7R IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) The onboard IDE connector is for the Ultra DMA (133/)100/66 signal cable. There are three connectors on each Ultra DMA 133/100/66 signal cable: blue, black, and gray . Connect the blue connector to the motherboardâÂÂs IDE connector , then select one of the following modes to conîÂÂgure your device. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector . This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. ⢠Install devices on this connector (PRI_IDE) îÂÂrst, then install on the JMicron î IDE connector , PRI_EIDE (see item #2 on the previous page for the location of the PRI_EIDE connector . If any device jumper is set as âÂÂCable-Select,â make sure all other device jumpers have the same setting. Drive jumper setting Mode of device(s) Cable connector Single device Cable-Select or Master - Black T wo devices Cable-Select Master Black Slave Gray Master Master Black or gray Slave Slave P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-33 ⢠These connectors are set to Standard IDE mode by default. In Standard IDE mode, you can connect Serial A T A boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial A T A RAID set using these connectors, set the ConîÂÂgure SA T A As item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.3.6 IDE ConîÂÂgurationâ for details. ⢠For RAID 5, use at least three hard disk drives. ⢠For RAID 10 (cross-RAID conîÂÂguration), use three hard disk drives on these connectors, and one hard disk drive on EZ_RAID1. See section âÂÂ5.4.5 Cross-RAID conîÂÂgurationâ for details. ⢠Use two Serial A T A hard disk drives for each RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. Important notes on Serial A T A ⢠Y ou must install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack 1 before using Serial A T A hard disk drives. The Serial A T A RAID feature (RAID 0/RAID 1/RAID 5/RAID 10) is available only if you are using Windows î 2000/XP/Server 2003 or later version. ⢠Wh en usin g t he con nec to rs in Standard IDE mode, connect the primary (boot) hard disk drive to the SA T A1 connector . 4. Intel î ICH7R Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1 [red], SA T A3 [black], SA T A4 [black], ) These connectors are for the Serial A T A signal cables for Serial A T A hard disk drives. If you installed Serial A T A hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 5 conîÂÂguration with the Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology through the onboard Intel î ICH7R RAID controller . Y ou may create a RAID 10 set through a cross-RAID conîÂÂguration with the onboard Intel î ICH7R RAID controller and ASUS EZ-Backup. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up Serial A T A RAID conîÂÂgurations. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE SA T A connectors SA T A1 GN D RS AT A_ TXP3 RS AT A_ TXN3 GN D RS AT A_ RXP3 RS AT A_ RXN3 GN D GN D RS AT A_ TXP1 RS AT A_ TXN1 GN D RS AT A_ RXP1 RS AT A_ RXN1 GN D SA T A3 GN D RS AT A_ TXP4 RS AT A_ TXN4 GN D RS AT A_ RXP4 RS AT A_ RXN4 GN D SA T A4
2-34 Chapter 2: Hardware information 5. JMicron î JMB363 Serial A T A connector (7-pin SA T A_RAID1 [black]) This connector is for a Serial A T A signal cable for a Serial A T A hard disk drive that you can combine with an external Serial A T A 3.0 �b/s device to conîÂÂgure a RAID 0, and RAID 1 set through the onboard Jmicron î JMB363 SA T A RAID controller . Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up Serial A T A RAID conîÂÂgurations. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE SA T A RAID connector SA T A_RAID1 GN D RS AT A_ TXP2 RS AT A_ TXN2 GN D RS AT A_ RXP2 RS AT A_ RXN2 GN D ⢠T o build RAID 1, we recommend that you install the hard disk drives on the ASUS EZ-Backup connectors (EZ_RAID1 and EZ_RAID2) to enjoy the instant setup; otherwise, you may also install on the ICH7R connectors. ⢠Y ou may install an extra hard disk drive on.the JMicron Serial A T A connector after using up the Intel î ICH7R and ASUS EZ-Backup connectors The JMicron î JMB363 Controller item in the BIOS is set to [Basic] by default, allowing you to enable the hot-plug function for the external device. Set to [Raid] to use the connector to build a RAID set. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Device ConîÂÂgurationâ for details. Connector Color Setting Use SA T A1 Red Master Boot disk SA T A 3/SA T A4 Black Slave Data disk Serial A T A hard disk drive connection
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-35 6. ASUS EZ-Backup Serial A T A connectors (7-pin EZ_RAID1 [orange], EZ_RAID2 [orange]) These connectors are for the ASUS EZ-Backup feature. Connect Serial A T A signal cables that support Serial A T A hard disk drives to build a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set easily . Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to build an EZ-Backup RAID set. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE EZ_RAID connectors EZ_RAID1 GN D RS AT A_ TXP2 RS AT A_ TXN2 GN D RS AT A_ RXP2 RS AT A_ RXN2 GN D GN D RS AT A_ TXP1 RS AT A_ TXN1 GN D RS AT A_ RXP1 RS AT A_ RXN1 GN D EZ_RAID2 Y ou may create a RAID 10 set through a cross-RAID conîÂÂguration by installing three hard disk drives on the ICH7R Serial A T A connectors, and one hard disk drive on EZ_RAID1. See section âÂÂ5.4.5 Cross-RAID conîÂÂguration for details. 7. MP3-In connector (4-pin MP3IN [red]) [red]) ) This connector is for the MP3-In module that allows you to connect your MP3 player to the speakers of the computer . For more information, refer to the MP3-In Module Quick Installation Guide or the ASUS FrontLinker⢠user guide. ⢠The MP3-In module is bundled with the motherboard package if the motherboard does not include the ASUS FrontLinkerâ¢. Connect the cable to the MP3IN connector , and enjoy music from computer speakers even when the PC is turned off. ⢠Do not plug the MP3-In cable into the Audio-In connector . P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE MP3-In connector MP3IN Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground
2-36 Chapter 2: Hardware information 9. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Th is con nec to r is for a c has sis -mo un te d f ron t pa nel au dio I /O mo dul e t ha t su ppo rts ei th er HD Au di o or leg acy A Câ 97 aud io s tan dar d. ⢠We recommend that you connect a high-deîÂÂnition front panel audio module to this connector to avail the motherboard high-deîÂÂnition audio capability . ⢠By default, this connector is set to HD Audio. If you want to connect a legacy AC `97 front panel audio module to this connector , set the Front Panel Support T ype item in the BIOS Setup to [AC97]. See page 4-28 for details. 8. Internal audio connector (4-pin CD) This connector allows you to receive stereo audio input from a CD-ROM. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Internal audio connector CD Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Analog front panel connector AAFP Legacy AC 97 audio pin definition SENSE2_RETUR PORT1 L PORT2 R PORT2 L SENSE1_RETUR SENSE_SEND PORT1 R PRESENCE# GND NC MIC2_L Line out_R Line out_L NC NC MIC2_R NC AGND HD Audio-compliant pin definition
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-37 10. USB connector (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with the USB 2.0 speciîÂÂcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Never connect a 1394 cable to the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE USB 2.0 connectors USB56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1 1 1. I EEE 13 94a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1 [Red]) This connector is for an additional IEEE 1394a port. Connect the IEEE 1394a module cable (red) to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. Never connect a USB port module cable to the IEEE 1394 connector . Doing so will damage the motherboard! P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE IEEE 1394a connector IE1394_1 1 GND 12V TPB1- GND TP A1- 12V TPB1 GND TP A1 Only USB34 on the rear panel can support S5 wake-up by keyboard/mouse function.
2-38 Chapter 2: Hardware information 12. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector . The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pins labeled âÂÂChassis Signalâ and âÂÂGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. 13. CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 3-pin PWR_F AN1, 3-pin PWR_F AN2, 3-pin CHA_F AN1, 3-pin CHA_F AN2) The fan c onnect ors su pport cooli ng fan s of 2A (24W max.) at 12V . Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Fan connectors CPU_F AN CHA_F AN1 PWR_F AN2 GND Rotation 12V CPU_F AN CHA_F AN2 PWR_F AN2 CHA_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM GND Rotation 12V PWR_F AN1 PWR_F AN1 CHA_F AN2 GND Rotation 12V For the rear chassis For the side chassis For the front chassis P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Chassis intrusion connector CHASSIS 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default)
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-39 Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. InsufîÂÂcient air îÂÂow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! If you install two VGA cards, we recommend that you plug the rear chassis fan cable to the motherboard connector labeled PWR_F AN1 or PWR_F AN2 for better thermal environment. Suggestions for installing the chassis fan: ⢠If you install a fan at the back of the chassis, plug the fan cable to PWR_F AN2 or PWR_F AN1. ⢠If you install a fan on the side of the chassis, plug the fan cable to CHA_F AN1. ⢠If you install a fan in front of the chassis, plug the fan cable to CHA_F AN2.
2-40 Chapter 2: Hardware information 14. ATX po wer con ne ct ors (24-pin EA TXPWR, 4-pin A TX12V) These connectors are for A TX power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to îÂÂt these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down îÂÂrmly until the connectors completely îÂÂt. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE A TX power connectors EA TXPWR A TX12V 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground 12V DC GND 12V DC GND Important notes on motherboard power requirements ⢠For a fully conîÂÂgured system, we recommend that you use a power supply unit (PSU) that complies with A TX 12 V SpeciîÂÂcation 2.0 (or later version) and provides a minimum power of 400 W . ⢠Do not forget to connect the 4-pin EA TX12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠T o support an Intel î Dual-Core CPU up to 965 Extreme Edition, make sure that the PSU can provide at least DC 16A (peak 22A) on the 12V_2 lead. The vendors list on the next page is provided for your reference
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-41 Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when conîÂÂguring a system with more power consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. Refer to the Power wattage tables below and on the next page for details. V endor Model Max. Power (W) FSP 400-60THN 400 Seasonic SS-600HT 600 Seasonic SS-400FT 400 Acbel A TX-550CA-AB8FM 550 THERMAL T AKE HPC-420-302 DF 400 AUSU S-30EP 300 Bestec A TX0400D5W 400 Silverstone SST ST56ZF 560 Enermax Eg701AX-VE 600 Power Supply Unit reference vendors list Loading Heavy Normal Light CPU Extreme Edition 965 Prescott 672 Conroe E6700 DDR2 800 1G*4 1G*2 512M*2 VGA A TI 1900XTX*2 NVIDIA 6800GTX*1 NVIDIA 6600*1 HDD IDE*2 IDE*1 IDE*1 SA T A*5 SA T A*3 SA T A*2 CD-ROM 2 2 1 USB 7 6 4 PCI-E 1 1 1 PCI 2 2 1 Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠Enabled Enabled Enabled DH Remote Enabled Enabled Enabled Required 12V current 12V -V2 12V -V1 12V -V2 12V -V1 12V -V2 12V -V1 >12A >18A >12A >8A >12A >6A Required wattage >=525W >=300W >=160W Power wattage
2-42 Chapter 2: Hardware information 15. System panel connector (20-pin P ANEL) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. ⢠System power LED (2-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector . The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector . The IDE LED lights up or îÂÂashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker . The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠A TX power button/soft-off button (2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF . ⢠Reset button (2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power . P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE System panel connector * Requires an A TX power supply . P ANEL PLED- PWR 5V Speaker Ground RESET Ground Reset Ground Ground PWRSW PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE_LED PLED SPEAKER
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-43 ASUS Q-Connector (system panel) Y ou can use the ASUS Q-Connector to connect/disconnect chassis front panel cables in a few steps. Refer to the instructions below to install the ASUS Q- Connector . 1. Connect the front panel cables to the ASUS Q-Connector . Refer to the labels on the Q-Connector to know the detailed pin deîÂÂnitions, then match them to the respective front panel cable labels. 2. Install the ASUS Q-Connector to the system panel connector , making sure the orientation matches the labels on the motherboard. 3. The front panel functions are now enabled. The îÂÂgure shows the Q-Connector properly installed on the motherboard.
2-44 Chapter 2: Hardware information Installing the optional fan 1. Position the fan above the pipe and heatsink assembly . 2. Fit the grooved edge to the heatsink. 3. Carefully push down the fan until it snugly îÂÂts the heatsink, then connect the fan cables. ⢠Plug the optional fan cables to the NB_F AN and/or PWR_F AN connector on the motherboard. ⢠Make sure the optional fan is installed correctly to prevent damage to the fan and motherboard components. Do not tilt the fan. Do not install the fan with its rear side facing you. Install the optional fan only if you are using a passive cooler or a water cooler . Installing the optional fan with an active CPU cooler will interfere with the airîÂÂow and destabilize the system.
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the îÂÂrst time ........................................................ 3-1 3.2 T urning off the computer ............................................................. 3-2
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 3-1 3.1 Starting up for the î¿rst time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover . 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector . 5. T urn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power , the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems withA TX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the A TX power button. If your monitor complies with âÂÂgreenâ standards or if it has a âÂÂpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST . While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power , the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. AMI BIOS beep codes 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4. Beep Description Error One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh T ime error No master drive detected T wo continuous beeps followed by two short beeps Floppy controller failure T wo continuous beeps followed by four short beeps Hardware component failure
3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 Turning off the computer 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function If you are using Windows î 2000: 1. Click the Start button then click Shut Down... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK button to shut down the computer . 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. If you are using Windows î XP or later version: 1. Click the Start button then select T urn Off Computer . 2. Click the T urn Off button to shut down the computer . 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section âÂÂ4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details.
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary 4 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................. 4-10 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................. 4-13 4.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-18 4.5 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-32 4.6 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-38 4.7 T ools menu ................................................................................. 4-43 4.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-46
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) 2. ASUS EZ Flash 2 (Updates the BIOS in DOS using a îÂÂoppy disk/USB îÂÂash disk, or the motherboard support CD.) 3. ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk.) 4. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk/ USB îÂÂash disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS îÂÂle fails or gets corrupted.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS îÂÂle to a bootable îÂÂoppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities. Installing ASUS Update T o install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click ASUS Update. See page 5-3 for the Utilities screen menu. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS îÂÂle ⢠Download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS îÂÂle ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP).
4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafîÂÂc, or click Auto Select. Click Next. Updating the BIOS through the Internet T o update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. Quit all Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility .
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-3 Updating the BIOS through a BIOS îÂÂle T o update the BIOS through a BIOS îÂÂle: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a îÂÂle option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail of all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS îÂÂle from the Open window , then click Save. 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.2 Creating a bootable îÂÂoppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable îÂÂoppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB îÂÂoppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB îÂÂoppy disk to the îÂÂoppy disk drive. b. Click Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My Computer. c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File from the menu, then select Format. A Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk window appears. e. Windows î XP users: Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options îÂÂeld, then click Start . Windows î 2000 environment T o create a set of boot disks for Windows î 2000: a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB îÂÂoppy disk into the drive. b. Insert the Windows î 2000 CD to the optical drive. c. Click Start, then select Run. d. In the Open îÂÂeld, type D:\bootdisk\makeboot a: assuming that D is your optical drive letter . e. Press <Enter>, then follow screen instructions to continue. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS îÂÂle to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-5 T o update the BIOS using EZ Flash 2: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for the motherboard. 2. Save the BIOS îÂÂle to a îÂÂoppy disk or a USB îÂÂash disk, then restart the system. 4.1.3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility The ASUS EZ Flash 2 feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a îÂÂoppy disk and using a DOS-based utility . The EZ Flash 2 utility is built-in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self T ests (POST). (2) Enter BIOS setup program. Go to the T ools menu to select EZ Flash2 and press <Enter> to enable it. Y ou can switch between drives by pressing <T ab> before the correct îÂÂle is found. Then press <Enter> 3. Y ou can launch the EZ Flash 2 by two methods. (1) Insert the îÂÂoppy disk/USB îÂÂash disk that contains the BIOS îÂÂle to the îÂÂoppy disk drive or the USB port. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility B312 FLASH TYPE: Winbond W39V080A 8Mb LPC BOARD: P5W-DH Deluxe VER: 0014 [0100] DATE: 05/19/2006 Current ROM Update ROM BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown PATH: C:\ A: C: Note [Enter] Select [S] Save [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move WIN98SE <DIR> NETTERM <DIR> DRIVERS <DIR> RECYCLED <DIR> WUTEMP <DIR> NEWFOL~1 <DIR> INSTALL <DIR> TEST_REB <DIR> MSDOWNLD.TMP <DIR> ⢠This functio n can supp ort de vices such as USB îÂÂash dis k, ha rd dis k, or îÂÂoppy disk with F A T 32/16/12 format only . ⢠Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! 4. When the correct BIOS îÂÂle is found, EZ Flash 2 performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done.
4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS setup The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS îÂÂle. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS îÂÂle to the îÂÂoppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. Reading îÂÂash ..... done Write to î¿le...... ok A:\> 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS îÂÂle in DOS environment using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk with the updated BIOS îÂÂle. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS îÂÂle that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS T o copy the current BIOS îÂÂle using the AFUDOS utility: Main îÂÂle name Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk you created earlier . 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[î¿lename] where the [îÂÂlename] is any user-assigned îÂÂlename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main îÂÂlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom ⢠Make sure that the îÂÂoppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1.2 MB free space to save the îÂÂle. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only . The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-7 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk you created earlier . 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[î¿lename] where [îÂÂlename] is the latest or the original BIOS îÂÂle on the bootable îÂÂoppy disk. Updating the BIOS îÂÂle T o update the BIOS îÂÂle using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) and download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for the motherboard. Save the BIOS îÂÂle to a bootable îÂÂoppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5WDH.rom Write the BIOS îÂÂlename on a piece of paper . Y ou need to type the exact BIOS îÂÂlename at the DOS prompt. A:\>afudos /iP5WDH.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îÂÂash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îÂÂash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îÂÂash ...... done Writing îÂÂash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility veriîÂÂes the îÂÂle and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5WDH.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îÂÂash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îÂÂash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îÂÂash ...... done Writing îÂÂash ...... done Verifying îÂÂash .... done Please restart your computer A:\>
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-9 4.1.5 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS îÂÂle when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Y ou can update a corrupted BIOS îÂÂle using the motherboard support CD, the îÂÂoppy disk, or the USB îÂÂash disk that contains the updated BIOS îÂÂle. Recovering the BIOS from the support CD T o recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. T urn on the system. 2. Insert the motherboard support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the CD for the BIOS îÂÂle. BIOS ROM checksum error Detecting IDE ATAPI device... Prepare the motherboard support CD, the îÂÂoppy disk or the USB îÂÂash disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility . 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. ⢠Only the USB îÂÂash disk with F A T 32/16/12 format and single partition can support ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3. The device size should be smaller than 8GB. ⢠Flash time takes around one (1) minute. ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! When found, the utility reads the BIOS îÂÂle and starts îÂÂashing the corrupted BIOS îÂÂle. Recovering the BIOS from a îÂÂoppy/USB îÂÂash disk T o recover the BIOS from a îÂÂoppy/USB îÂÂash disk: 1. Download the latest BIOS from the ASUS website (www .asus.com). Rename the BIOS îÂÂle as P5WDH.ROM . 2. Insert the îÂÂoppy/USB îÂÂash disk that contains BIOS îÂÂle to the FDD/USB port. 3. T urn on the system. 4. The utility will automatically checks the devices for the BIOS îÂÂle When found, the utility reads the BIOS îÂÂle and starts îÂÂashing the corrupted BIOS îÂÂle. 5. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process.
4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable îÂÂrmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section âÂÂ4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconîÂÂguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun Setup.â This section explains how to conîÂÂgure your system using this utility . Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conîÂÂguration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconîÂÂgure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM or the îÂÂrmware hub. The îÂÂrmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility . When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST , restart the system by pressing <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. Y ou can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the îÂÂrst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section âÂÂ4.8 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for this motherboard.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-11 System Time [06:22:54] System Date [Fri 05/04/2006] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master [ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave [ASUS CD-S520/A] Third IDE Master [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave [Not Detected] IDE Conî¿guration System Information 4.2.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conîÂÂguration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) conîÂÂguration Boot For changing the system boot conîÂÂguration Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings T o select an item on the menu bar , press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another . Navigation keys General help Menu bar Sub-menu items ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds Menu items Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system.
4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciîÂÂc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power , Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. T o display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6 ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds These îÂÂelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- conîÂÂgurable, you can change the value of the îÂÂeld opposite the item. Y ou cannot select an item that is not user-conîÂÂgurable. A conîÂÂgurable îÂÂeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a îÂÂeld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ4.2.7 Pop-up window .â 4.2.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conîÂÂguration options for that item. 4.2.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not îÂÂt on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. Main menu items Scroll bar Pop-up window System Time [06:22:54] System Date [Fri 05/04/2006] Legac y Disket te A [1 . 44 M, 3 . 5 in] Language [English] Pr ima ry IDE M as ter [S T32 041 3A] Pr ima ry IDE S la ve [A SUS CD -S5 20 /A ] Th ird ID E M as te r [No t D ete cte d] Th ird ID E S la ve [No t D et ec ted ] Fo urt h I DE Ma st er [N ot Det ect ed ] Fo urt h I DE Sl av e [No t D ete cte d] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-13 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of îÂÂoppy drive installed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] 4.3.4 Language [English] Allows you to choose the BIOS language version from the options. ConîÂÂguration options: [English] [Français] [Deutsch] [Japanese] [Chinese (GB)] [Chinese BIG5] Refer to section âÂÂ4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. System Time [06:22:54] System Date [Fri 05/04/2006] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master [ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave [ASUS CD-S520/A] Third IDE Master [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave [Not Detected] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system.
4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.5 Primary , Third, and Fourth IDE Master/Slave The BIOS automatically detects the connected IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item, then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-conîÂÂgurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. T ype [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are speciîÂÂcally conîÂÂguring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. ConîÂÂguration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector T ransfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Primary IDE Master Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST320413A Size : 20.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : 4 Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-15 PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] DMA Mode [Auto] Selects the DMA mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data T ransfer [Enabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ConîÂÂgure SA T A As [Standard IDE] Sets the conîÂÂguration for the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial A T A features that increases storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. If you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10, or the Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology conîÂÂguration from the Serial A T A hard disk drives, set this item to [RAID]. If you want to use the Serial A T A hard disk drives as Parallel A T A physical storage devices, keep the defaul setting [Standard IDE]. If yo u w ant t he Se ria l AT A h ard di sk d riv es to u se the Ad va nc ed Hos t C on tro lle r In ter fac e ( AH CI ), set t hi s i tem to [ AH CI] . IDE Conî¿guration Conî¿gure SATA As [Standard IDE] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] When in AHCI/ RAID mode SATA controller is forced to Native mode. 4.3.6 IDE ConîÂÂguration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conîÂÂgurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you want to conîÂÂgure the item.
4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Fo r d eta ils o n AHC I, go t o: www .intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012304.htm www .intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012305.htm The SA T A controller is set to Native mode when this item is set to [RAID] or [AHCI] The Onboard IDE Operate Mode and sub-menu items appear only when the ConîÂÂgure SA T A As item is set to [Standard IDE]. Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the installed operating system (OS). Set to [Enhanced Mode] if you are using native OS including Windows î 2000/XP or later version. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Compatible Mode] [Enhanced Mode] If you are using a Serial A T A optical drive, set this item to [Compatible Mode] before creating a boot disk using the support CD. Enhanced Mode Support On [S-A T A] Allows you to use native OS on Serial A T A and Parallel A T A ports. It is recommend that you do not change the default setting for better OS compatibility . In this setting, you may use legacy OS on the Parallel A T A ports only if you do not install any Serial A T A device. The P-A T A S-A T A and P-A T A options are for advanced users only . If you set to any of these options and encountered problems, revert to the default setting S-A T A. ConîÂÂguration options: [S-A T A P-A T A] [S-A T A only] [P-A T A only] Combined Mode Option [Primary P-A T A S-A T A] Allows you to select the IDE ports to use. ConîÂÂguration options: [Primary P-A T A S-A T A] [S-A T A only] [P-A T A only] The S-A T A and P-A T A options are for advanced users only . If you set to any of these options and encounter problems, revert to the default setting [Primary P-A T A S-A T A]. ConîÂÂguration options: [Primary P-A T A S-A T A] [S-A T A] [P-A T A] The Combined Mode Option item appears only when the Onboard IDE Operate Mode item is set to [Compatible Mode]. Onboard Serial-A T A BOOTROM [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard Serial A T A boot ROM. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Onboard Serial-A T A BOOTROM appears only when the ConîÂÂgure SA T A As item is set to [RAID].
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-17 4.3.7 System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciîÂÂcations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. AMI BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU speciîÂÂcation. System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory . AMIBIOS Version : 0124 Build Date : 05/25/06 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.80GHz Speed : 3800 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Size : 512MB Appropriated : 0MB Available : 512MB IDE Detect Time Out [35] Selects the time out value for detecting A T A/A T API devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] The ALPE and ASP and its sub-menu item appear only when the ConîÂÂgure SA T A As item is set to [AHCI]. ALPE and ASP [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Agressive Link Power Management (ALPE) and Aggressive Slumber/Partial (ASP) management features. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. JumperFree Conî¿guration LAN Cable Status USB Conî¿guration CPU Conî¿guration Chipset Onboard Devices Conî¿guration PCIPnP DH Feature page 4.4.1 JumperFree ConîÂÂguration AI Overclocking [Auto] Allows you to select the overclocking options to achieve the desired CPU internal frequency . Select either one of the preset overclocking conîÂÂgiuration options. Manual - allows you to individually set overclocking parameters. Auto - loads the optimal settings for the system. Overclock ProîÂÂle - loads overclocking proîÂÂles with optimal parameters for stability when overclocking. AI NOS - the ASUS AI Non-delay Overclocking System feature intelligently determines the system load and automatically boost the performance for the most demanding tasks. T ake caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Adjust system frequency/voltage. Conî¿gure System Frequency/Voltage AI Overclocking [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Select the targe CPU frequency, and the relevant parameters will be auto-adjusted. Frequencies higher than CPU manufacturer recommends are not guaranteed to be stable. If the system becomes unstable, return to the default.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-19 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization The following items appear only when you set the AI Overclocking item to [Manual]. CPU Frequency [XXX] Displays the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the CPU frequency . Y ou can also type the desired CPU frequency using the numeric keypad. The values range from 100 to 450. Refer to the table below for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. A vailable DRAM frequency options in various FSB settings * Provided for overclocking purpose only . Selecting a very high DRAM frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [DDR2-300MHz] [DDR2-400MHz] Performance Mode [Auto] Allows enhanced system performance. Setting to [T urbo] may cause the system to become unstable. If this happens, revert to the default setting [Auto]. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Standard] [T urbo] Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency FSB 1066 266 MHz FSB 800 200 MHz î FSBî ConîÂÂgurationîÂÂoptions Auto DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- 400 533 667 711* 800* 889* 1067* FSB 1066 ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠FSB 800 ⢠⢠⢠⢠â¢
4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup PCI Express Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the PCI Express frequency . This item is set to [Auto] by default. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [90] [91] ~ [150] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] A ll ow s yo u to s yn ch ro ni z e t he P CI f re qu en cy w it h t he P CI E xp re ss o r CP U fr eq ue nc y. C on îÂÂg ur at io n op ti on s: [ T o C PU ] [33.33MHz] [Auto] The following items also appear when the AI Overclocking item is set to [AI NOS]. Memory V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the DDR2 reference voltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.80V] [1.90V] [1.95V] [2.00V] [2.05V] [2.10V] [2.15V] [2.20V] [2.25V] [2.30V] [2.35V] [2.40V] Refe r to t he DDR2 docum entatio n befo re adj usti ng the memory volta ge. Set ting a very high memory voltag e may d amage the me mory modul e(s)! CPU VCore V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU VCore voltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.7000V] [1.6875V] [1.6750V] [1.6625V] [1.6500V] [1.6375V] [1.6250V] [1.6125V] [1.6000V] [1.5875V] [1.5750V] [1.5625V] [1.5500V] [1.5375V] [1.5250V] [1.5125V] [1.5000V] [1.4875V] [1.4750V] [1.4625V] [1.4500V] [1.4375V] [1.4250V] [1.4125V] [1.4000V] [1.3875V] [1.3750V] [1.3625V] [1.3500V] [1.3375V] [1.3250V] [1.3125V] [1.3000V] [1.2875V] [1.2750V] [1.2625V] [1.2500V] [1.2375V] [1.2250V] [1.2125V] [1.2000V] Refer to the CPU documentation before setting the CPU Vcore voltage. Setting a high Vcore voltage may damage the CPU! FSB T ermination V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the front side bus termination voltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.20V] [1.30V] [1.40V] [1.50V] Setting a high FSB termination voltage may damage the chipset and CPU.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-21 MCH Chipset V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the chipset voltage of the memory controller hub (MCH). ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.50V] [1.55V] [1.60V] [1.65V] Setting a high MCH chipset voltage may damage the chipset! ICH Chipset V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the chipset voltage of the I/O controller hub (ICH). ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.05V] [1.20V] Setting a high ICH chipset voltage may damage the chipset! The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking item is set to [Overclock ProîÂÂle]. Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Allows you to overclock the CPU speed through the available preset values. ConîÂÂguration options: [Overclock 5%] [ FSB888/DDR2-667] [Overclock 10%] [ FSB960/DDR2-800] [Overclock 15%] [ FSB1200/DDR2-800] [Overclock 20%] [ FSB1280/DDR2-800] [Overclock 30%] [ FSB1333/DDR2-667] [FSB1333/DDR2-834] The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking item is set to [AI NOS]. N.O.S. Mode [Auto] Sets the Non-Delay Overclocking System mode. Select either of the following conîÂÂguration options: Auto - loads the optimum sensitivity and overclocking percentage setting. Manual - allows you to manually set overclocking conîÂÂgurations. The following items appear if the NOS Mode item is set to [Manual] Sensitivity [Sensitive] Allows you to choose the sensitivity of the AI NOS sensor . Setting this item to [Sensitive] will trigger AI NOS with less CPU loading. ConîÂÂguration options: [Normal] [Sensitive] [Less-Sensitive]
4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status This menu displays the status of the Local Area Network (LAN) cable connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port. POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable LAN cable check during POST . When enabled, the menu reports the cable faults or shorts, and displays the point (length) where the fault or short is detected. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] LAN Cable Status Pair Status Length 1-2 Normal N/A 3-6 Normal N/A 4-5 Normal N/A 7-8 Normal N/A 1-2 Open 0.0M 3-6 Open 0.0M 4-5 Open 0.0M 7-8 Open 0.0M Check PCI Marvell LAN cable during POST. T arget Frequency [Overclock 3%] Allows you to set the maximum overclock percentage for the selected NOS Mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 7%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] Selecting a very high frequency may cause the system to become unstable. If this happens, revert to the default setting.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-23 4.4.3 USB ConîÂÂguration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. USB Conî¿guration Module Version - 2.24.0-10.4 USB Devices Enabled: None USB Function [8 USB Ports] Legacy USB Support [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Disabled] Enables USB host controllers. The Module V ersion and USB Devices Enabled items show the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. USB Function [8 USB Ports] Disables the USB host controllers or speciîÂÂes the . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [2 USB ports] [4 USB ports] [6 USB ports] [8 [2 USB ports] [4 USB ports] [6 USB ports] [8 USB ports] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to [Auto] allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to disable the USB 2.0 controller , or specify the number of ports to enable ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). ConîÂÂguration options: [HiSpeed ] [FullSpeed ] BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Disabled] Allows you to enable support for operating systems without an EHCI hand-off feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Ratio CMOS Setting [ 28] Sets the ratio between the CPU core clock and the Front Side Bus frequency . The BIOS auto-detects the default value of this item. Use the < > or <-> keys to adjust the values. Y ou can only adjust the Ratio CMOS if you installed an unlocked CPU. Refer to the CPU documentation for details. 4.4.4 CPU ConîÂÂguration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Conî¿gure Advanced CPU settings Manufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.80GHz Frequency : 3800 MHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 2048 KB Cache L3 : 0 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked (Max:19, Min:14) Ratio Actual Value : 19 Ratio CMOS Setting: [ 28] AI CPU Lock Free [Auto] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Execute Disable Function [Disabled] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Virtualization Technology [Enabled] Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ. The AI CPU Lock Free item appears only when you install a CPU that supports the lock free feature. Only some latest CPUs support this feature. AI CPU Lock Free [Auto] Disables or sets the AI CPU Lock Free feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the microcode updation. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Max CPUID V alue Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-25 Execute Disable Function [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the No-Execution Page Protection T echnology . Setting this item to [Enabled] forces the XD feature îÂÂag to always return to zero (0). ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Allows you to disable or set to auto the CPU Internal Thermal Control function. When set to [Auto], the BIOS automatically checks the CPUâÂÂs capability to enable TM or TM2 support. In TM mode, the CPU power consumption is reduced. In TM2 mode, the CPU core and VID are reduced. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] The following item appears only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST). Intel(R) SpeedStep T echnology [Disabled] Allows you to use the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology . When set to [Automatic], you can adjust the system power settings in the operating system to use the EIST feature. Se t t his it em t o [ Dis ab le d] if you do not want to use the EIST . ConîÂÂguration options: [Automatic] [Disabled] [Minimum] ⢠Refer to the Appendix for details on how to use the EIST feature. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EIST . The following item appears only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports Hyper Threading T echnology . Hyper Threading T echnology [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading T echnology . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.5 Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Advanced Chipset Settings Conî¿gure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] DRAM ECC Mode [Disabled] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] DRAM Throttling Threshold [Auto] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Enable or Disable Conî¿gure DRAM Timing by SPD. ConîÂÂgure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. The following sub-items appear when this item is Disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM CAS# Latency [5 Clocks] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. ConîÂÂguration options: [6 Clocks] [5 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [3 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [4 Clocks] C on tr ol s th e id le c lo ck s af te r is su in g a pr ec ha r ge c om ma nd t o th e DD R S D RA M. C on îÂÂg ur at io n op ti on s: [ 2 Cl oc ks ] ~ [6 Clocks] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [4 Clocks] Controls the laten cy bet ween t he DD R S DRAM a ctive comma nd and the rea d/writ e comm and. C onîÂÂgu rat ion op tions: [2 C loc ks] ~ [6 Clocks ] DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge Delay [15 Clocks] ConîÂÂguration options: [4 Clocks] ~ [18 Clocks] DRAM Write Recovery Time [4 Clocks] ConîÂÂguration options: [2 Clocks] ~ [6 Clocks]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-27 DRAM ECC Mode [Disabled] Allows you to disable or set the DRAM ECC mode. This item appears only when you install DRAM modules that support ECC function. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Allows you to enable, disable, or set the ASUS Hyper Path 3 feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] DRAM Throttling Threshold [Auto] Disables or sets the DRAM Thermal Throttling feature. Set to [Auto] for system stability . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. ConîÂÂguration options: [PCI Express/PCI] [PCI/PCI Express] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Sets the length of the PCI Express graphics card buffer . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Long] [Short] Link Latency [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card link latency . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] PEG Root Control [Auto] Allows you to enable, disable, or set to automatic the PCI Express graphics card root control. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] PEG Link Mode [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics link mode. Setting this item to [Auto] allows the motherboard to automatically adjust the PCI Express graphics link mode to the correct frequency based on the system conîÂÂguration. Four additional settings are available for overclocking the PE� Link Mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] [Fast] [Faster] Slot Power [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card slot power . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Light] [Normal] [Heavy] [Heavier]
4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.6 Onboard Devices ConîÂÂguration HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the high-deîÂÂnition audio CODEC. ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Front Panel Support T ype [HD A ud io ] Al low s y ou to s et the f ro nt pan el au di o c onn ec to r ( AAF P) mode to legacy ACâÂÂ97 or highâÂÂdeîÂÂnition audio depending on the audio standard that the front panel audio module supports. ConîÂÂguration options: [AC97] [HD Audio] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard IEEE 1394 controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard PCIE GbE LAN_1 [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard PCI Express Gigabit LAN 1 controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard PCIE GbE LAN_2 [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard PCI Express Gigabit LAN 2 controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] This item allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller . This item appears only when the Onboard PCIE Gbe LAN item is set to Enabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Conî¿gure Win627EHG Super IO Chipset HD Audio Controller [Enabled ] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Onboard PCIE GbE LAN_1 [Enabled] Onboard PCIE GbE LAN_2 [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] JMicron SATA/PATA Controller [Enabled] JMicron Controller Mode [Basic] JMicron SATA/RAID BOOTROM [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Enable or disable High Deî¿nition Audio Controller.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-29 JMicron SA T A/P A T A Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the JMicron Serial A T A/Parallel A T A controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] JMicron Controller Mode [Basic] Allows you to set the mode of the JMicron controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Raid] [Basic] [AHCI] JMicron SA T A/RAID BOOTROM [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the JMicron Serial A T A RAID boot ROM. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Setting the above item to [Disabled] may cause adverse effects. W e strongly [Disabled] may cause adverse effects. W e strongly recommend that you keep the default setting [Enabled]. Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3]
4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.7 PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS conîÂÂgures all the devices in the system. When set to [Y es] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conîÂÂgures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. ConîÂÂguration options: [No] [Y es] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register . ConîÂÂguration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Y es] When set to [Y es], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. ConîÂÂguration options: [No] [Y es] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the palette snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] T ake caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. NO : L ets th e BI OS co nî¿g ue all t he de vic es in th e sys tem . YE S: Let s t he op era tin g s ys te m co nî¿g ure Pl ug a nd Pla y (P nP) de vic es n ot re qui red fo r bo ot if yo ur sys tem h as a Plu g an d P lay op er at ing sy ste m.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-31 IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the speciîÂÂc IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved] 4.4.8 DH Feature page EZ Backup RAID Mode Change [Disabled] Options Enabled Disabled EZ Backup RAID Mode Change [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RAID mode change for the EZ-Backup feature. For detailed information about building an EZ-Backup RAID set, see section âÂÂ5.4.4 Silicon Image RAID conîÂÂguration.â ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM) features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced Con îÂÂgura tio n a nd Pow er Int erface (ACP I) sta te to be use d for system susp end . Sett ing th is it em to [Auto] allow s the OS to selec t the ACP I stat e. Con îÂÂgurat ion o pti ons: [ S1 (PO S) On ly] [S3 Only] [Auto] 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. Con îÂÂgurat ion op tions: [No] [Y es] 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [No] Allows you to add more tables for Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) 2.0 speciîÂÂcations. ConîÂÂguration options: [No] [Y es] 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conî¿guration Hardware Monitor Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-33 APM Conî¿guration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Go into On/Off or Suspend when Power button is pressed. 4.5.5 APM ConîÂÂguration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. ConîÂÂguration options: [On/Off] [Suspend] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to Power Off, the system goes into of f state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. ConîÂÂguration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The succeeding items appear when the Power On By RTC Alarm item is set to Enabled. RTC Alarm Date T o set the alarm date, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection. ConîÂÂguration options: [Everyday] [1] [2] [3]... ~ [31] RTC Alarm Hour T o set the alarm hour , highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection. ConîÂÂguration options: [00] [1]... ~ [23] RTC Alarm Minute T o set the alarm minute, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection. ConîÂÂguration options: [00] [1]... ~ [59]
4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup RTC Alarm Second T o set the alarm second, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection. ConîÂÂguration options: [00] [1]... ~ [59] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the îÂÂrst try . T urning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is of f causes an initialization string that turns the system power on. Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI LAN or modem card. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI Express device. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to use speciîÂÂc keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Space Bar] [Ctrl-Esc] [Power Key] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-35 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor AI Quiet [Enabled] CPU Temperature [54úC/129úF] MB Temperature [37úC/98.5úF] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [2884RPM] CPU Q-Fan Control [Enabled] [Enabled] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Fan Proî¿le [Optimal] [Optimal] Chassis Fan1 Speed (RPM) [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed (RPM) [N/A] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Enabled] Chassis Fan Proî¿le [Optimal] [Optimal] Power Fan1 Speed (RPM) [N/A] Power Fan2 Speed (RPM) [N/A] PWR Q-Fan Control [Enabled] PWR Fan Proî¿le [Optimal] Automatically optimize BIOS settings to minimize CPU FAN Speed according to system loading. VCORE Voltage [ 1.488V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.312V] 5V Voltage [ 5.324V] 12V Voltage [12.144V] Scroll down to display more items AI Quiet [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS AI Quiet feature. ASUS AI Quiet optimizes system performance by automatically adjusting the CPU fan speed according to the system loading. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] CPU T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] MB T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Ignored] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îÂÂeld shows N/A. Select [Ignored] from the item options to disable CPU fan speed monitoring.
4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup CPU Q-Fan Control [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the CPU Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efîÂÂcient system operation. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The CPU Q-Fan Mode and CPU Fan ProîÂÂle Mode items appear when you enable the ASUS Q-F AN Control feature. CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] Allows you to select the type of CPU fan cable connected to the CPU fan connector . Set to [PWM] when using a 4-pin CPU fan cable. Set to [DC] when using a 3-pin CPU fan cable. ConîÂÂguration options: [PWM] [DC] Some CPU fans with a 4-pin cable do not comply with Intel î âÂÂs PWM fan speciîÂÂcation. When using this type of CPU fan, you can not reduce the CPU fan speed even if you set the CPU Q-Fan Mode to [PWM]. CPU Fan ProîÂÂle [Optimal] Allows you to set the appropriate CPU fan performance. When set to [Optimal], the CPU fan automatically adjusts depending on the CPU temperature. Set this item to [Silent] to minimize fan speed for quiet CPU fan operation, or [Performance] to achieve maximum CPU fan speed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] Chassis Fan1/2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A]/[Ignored] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the chassis fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the chassis, the speciîÂÂc îÂÂeld shows N/A. Select [Ignored] from the item options to disable chassis fan speed monitoring. Chassis Q-Fan Control [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the chassis fan speeds for more efîÂÂcient system operation. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ⢠The Chassis Q-Fan function is available only on CHA_FAN1. ⢠The Chassis Fan ProîÂÂle Mode item appears when you enable the Chassis Q-Fan Control feature. Chassis Fan ProîÂÂle [Optimal] Allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the chassis Q-Fan. ConîÂÂguration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-37 Power Fan1/2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] or [Ignored] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected, the speciîÂÂc îÂÂeld shows N/A. Select [Ignored] from the item options to disable power fan speed monitoring. PWR Q-Fan Control [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the power fan speeds for more efîÂÂcient system operation. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] PWR Fan ProîÂÂle [Optimal] Allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the power Q-Fan. ConîÂÂguration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] VCORE V oltage, 3.3V V oltage, 5V V oltage, 12V V oltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators.
4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Boot Settings Boot Device Priority Hard Disk Drives Boot Settings Conî¿guration Security 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [PM-ST330620A] 3rd Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] Speciî¿es the Boot Device Priority sequence. A virtual îÂÂoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B:) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the î¿rst boot device. Speciî¿es the Boot Device Priority sequence. A virtual îÂÂoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B:) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the î¿rst boot device.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-39 4.6.2 Hard Disk Drives 1st ~ xxth Drive [ HDD: XXXXXXXX Drive ] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available hard disk drives. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] Boot Device Priority 1st Drive [HDD: XXXXXXXX Drive] 2nd Drive [HDD: XXXXXXXX Drive] Speciî¿es the Boot Device Priority sequence from available Hard Drives. 4.6.3 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration Boot Settings Conî¿guration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-40 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo 2 feature. Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. ConîÂÂguration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. ConîÂÂguration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] W ait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDEL â Message Display [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-41 4.6.4 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Sel ect th e Chan ge Sup ervis or Pas sword item, then pre ss <En ter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. ConîÂÂrm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. To cl ear th e su per vis or p ass wor d, se le ct the C ha nge Su per vi so r P ass wor d the n p res s <E nte r>. Th e me ssa ge âÂÂP as swo rd Uni ns ta lle dâ ap pe ars . If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section âÂÂ2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM.
4-42 Chapter 4: BIOS setup After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. ConîÂÂguration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility . View Only allows access but does not allow change to any îÂÂeld. Limited allows changes only to selected îÂÂelds, such as Date and T ime. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the îÂÂelds in the Setup utility . Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. ConîÂÂrm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully . T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-43 Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Setup] [Always] ASUS Music Alarm HASUS EZ Flash 4.7 Tools menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Onboard IDE Operate Mode should be set to [Compatible] Mode to ] Mode to Mode to enable Music Alarm for Intel chipset. Asus Music Alarm Option ASUS Music Alarm [Disabled] Detect CD [Enter] Starting Track [Disabled] Press ENTER to run the utility to select and update the BIOS. This utility does not support: 1. NTFS format 4.7.1 ASUS Music Alarm
4-44 Chapter 4: BIOS setup The succeeding items become user-conîÂÂgurable when you enable the ASUS Music Alarm. ASUS Music Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Music Alarm function. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Alarm Day: Sunday/Monday/T uesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/ Saturday [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the alarm for a particular day . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Alarm Time (hh:mm) 0 : 0 Allows you to set the alarm time. Press <T ab> to select the îÂÂeld, then use < > or <-> to change the value. Audio CD Device [Primary IDE Slave] Allows you to select the connection conîÂÂguration of the optical storage device from which the alarm music will play from. ConîÂÂguration options: [Primary IDE Master] [Primary IDE Slave] Detect CD Press <Enter> to search the CD track number . Starting T rack Allows you to choose the starting track from the CD from which you would like the alarm music to play . Repeat T rack [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the repeat track function. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Single] [All] Duration [10 Mins] Allows you to set the length of the music alarm. ConîÂÂguration options: [10 Mins] [20 Mins] [30 Mins] [1 Hour]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-45 V olume [16] Allows you to set the volume level of the music alarm. ConîÂÂguration options: [01] ~ [32] ⢠Only the IDE A T API devices from South bridge can support this functon. ⢠The system needs stanby power , so ensure that the power cord is plugged. ⢠Y ou can also set the alarm time under operating system using ASUS Music Alarm Utility . See section 5.3.6 for details. ⢠ASUS Music Alarm only supports audio CDs. 4.7.2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 Allows you to run ASUS EZ Flash 2. When you press <Enter>, a conîÂÂrmation message appears. Use the left/right arrow key to select between [Ok] or [Cancel], then press <Enter> to conîÂÂrm your choice. ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility B312 FLASH TYPE: Winbond W39V080A 8Mb LPC BOARD: P5W-DH Deluxe VER: 0014 [0100] DATE: 05/19/2006 Current ROM Update ROM BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown PATH: C:\ A: C: Note [Enter] Select [S] Save [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move WIN98SE <DIR> NETTERM <DIR> DRIVERS <DIR> RECYCLED <DIR> WUTEMP <DIR> NEWFOL~1 <DIR> INSTALL <DIR> TEST_REB <DIR> MSDOWNLD.TMP <DIR>
4-46 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to îÂÂelds other than System Date, System T ime, and Password, the BIOS asks for a conîÂÂrmation before exiting. Discard Changes Allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a conîÂÂrmation appears. Select OK to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults Allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a conîÂÂrmation window appears. Select OK to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM. Exit & Save Changes Once you are îÂÂnished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the computer is turned off. When you select this option, a conîÂÂrmation window appears. Select OK to save the changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. 4.8 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items.
5 Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary 5 5.1 Installing an operating system ................................................... 5-1 5.2 Support CD information .............................................................. 5-1 5.3 Software information ................................................................. 5-10 5.4 RAID conîÂÂgurations .................................................................. 5-29 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ....................................................... 5-64
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-1 5.1 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows î 2000/2003 Server/XP operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. 5.2 Support CD information The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. 5.2.1 Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary . Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only . Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Make sure that you install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack1 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability . If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the îÂÂle ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates. Click an icon to display support CD/motherboard information Click an item to install
5-2 Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.2 Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. ASUS InstAll -Drivers Installation Wizard Launches the ASUS InstallAll driver installation wizard. Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Installs the Intel î Chipset INF Update Program. This driver enables Plug-n-Play INF support for the Intel î chipset components on the motherboard. When installed to the target system, this driver provides the method for conîÂÂguring the chipset components. Y ou can install this utility using three different modes: interactive, silent or unattended preload. Installing the driver in interactive mode requires user input during installation. User input is not required when installing the driver in silent or unattended preload modes. Refer to the online help or readme îÂÂle that came with the utility for details. Realtek Audio Driver Installs the Realtek î ALC882M audio driver and application. See section âÂÂ5.3.3 Audio conîÂÂgurationsâ for details. JMicron JMB36X RAID Controller Driver Installs the JMicron î JMB363 RAID controller driver . Marvell Y ukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Installs the Marvell Y ukon Gigabit Ethernet LAN driver .
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-3 5.2.3 Utilities menu The Utilities menu displays the software applications and utilities that the motherboard supports. Click on an item to install. USB 2.0 Driver Installs the USB 2.0 driver . ASUS InstAll - Installation Wizard for Utilities Launches the ASUS InstallAll utilities installation wizard. Marvell Y ukon VCT Application Installs the Marvell î Y ukon Virtual Cable T ester⢠(VCT) application that diagnoses and reports LAN cable faults and shorts using the T ime Domain ReîÂÂectometry (TDR) technology . WiFi-AP Solo Installs the WiFi-AP Solo⢠utility , which allows a new level of versitility for your PC, enabling it to create a complete wireless home network in either AP or wirelesss client mode. ASUS DH Remote Installs the utility for the ASUS DH Remote, a handy remote controller that lets you operate key PC functions from a distance. Power on, adjust fan speed according to CPU loading for low noise and high power savings, and even control the media player with the one touch convenience.
5-4 Chapter 5: Software support ASUS PC Probe II This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you of any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer in healthy operating condition. ASUS Update The ASUS Update utility that allows you to update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. This utility requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). See page 4-8 for details. ASUS Ai Booster The ASUS Ai Booster application allows you to overclock the CPU speed in Windows î environment. Ez-Backup Manager Utility Installs the EzRaid Manager Utility for EZ Backup, which allows you to mirror your data instantaneously . EZ Backup leverages the Serial A T A 2 3.0/1.5 Gb/s technology to deliver handy plug-and-play RAID without requiring any conîÂÂguration or setup. Choose from either the default RAID 1 conîÂÂguration, or RAID 0 setting. See section âÂÂ5.4.4 Silicon Image RAID conîÂÂgurationâ for more information. ADOBE Acrobat Reader The Adobe Acrobat î Reader V7.0 is for opening, viewing, and printing documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). Microsoft DirectX 9.0c The Microsoft DirectX î 9.0c is a multimedia technology that enhances computer graphics and sounds. DirectX î improves the multimedia features of your computer so you can enjoy watching TV and movies, capturing videos, or playing games in your computer . Anti-virus Utility The anti-virus utility scans, identiîÂÂes, and removes computer viruses. View the online help for detailed information. Click to open the next screen.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-5 Click to view the previous screen. ASUS Screen Saver Bring life to your idle screen by installing the ASUS screen saver .
5-6 Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.4 Make Disk menu The Make Disk menu allows you to make RAID/Serial A T A driver disks for Intel ICH7R and JMicron software RAID. Intel ICH7R 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Intel ICH7R 64 bit RAID Driver Disk Allows you to create an Intel î ICH7R RAID driver disk for a 32/64-bit system. Make JMicron JMB36X 32/64-bit RAID Driver Allows you to create a JMicron JMB363 RAID driver disk for a 32/64-bit system.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-7 5.2.5 Manual menu The Manual menu contains the user manuals for third party components and applications. ⢠Most user manual îÂÂles are in Portable Document Format (PDF). Install the Adobe Acrobat Reader application from the Utilities tab before opening a user manual îÂÂle. ⢠The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates). 5.2.6 Contact information Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. Y ou can also îÂÂnd this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
5-8 Chapter 5: Software support Browse this CD Displays the contents of the support CD in graphical format. 5.2.7 Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen provide additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support CD. Click an icon to display the speciîÂÂed information. Motherboard Info Displays the general speciîÂÂcations of the motherboard.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-9 T echnical Support Form Displays the ASUS T echnical Support Request Form that you have to îÂÂll out when requesting technical support. Filelist Displays the contents of the support CD in text format.
5-10 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3 Software information Most of the applications in the support CD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme îÂÂle that came with the software application for more information. 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo 2 The ASUS MyLogo 2 utility lets you customize the boot logo. The boot logo is the image that appears on screen during the Power-On-Self-T ests (POST). The ASUS MyLogo3⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update utility from the support CD. See section âÂÂ5.2.3 Utilities menuâ for details. T o launch the ASUS MyLogo 2: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility . Refer to section âÂÂ4.1.5 ASUS Update utilityâ for details. 2. Select Options from the drop down menu, then click Next. 3. Check the option Launch MyLogo to replace system boot logo before îÂÂashing BIOS, then click Next. 4. Select Update BIOS from a îÂÂle from the drop down menu, then click Next. 5. When prompted, locate the new BIOS îÂÂle, then click Next. The ASUS MyLogo 2 window appears. 6. From the left window pane, select the folder that contains the image you intend to use as your boot logo. ⢠Before using the ASUS MyLogo 2, use the AFUDOS utility to make a copy of your original BIOS îÂÂle, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. See section âÂÂ4.1.2 AFUDOS utility .â â¢ Make sure that the BIOS item Full Screen Logo is set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogo3. See section âÂÂ4.6.2 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration.â â¢ Y ou can create your own boot logo image in BMP îÂÂle format. ⢠The îÂÂle size should be smaller than 150 K.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-11 9. When the screen returns to the ASUS Update utility , îÂÂash the original BIOS to load the new boot logo. 10. After îÂÂashing the BIOS, restart the computer to display the new boot logo during POST . 8. Adjust the boot image to your desired size by selecting a value on the Ratio box. 7. When the logo images appear on the right window pane, select an image to enlarge by clicking on it.
5-12 Chapter 5: Software support 3. Click the Run button to perform a cable test. 5.3.2 AI NET2 The AI NET2 features the Marvell î Virtual Cable T ester⢠(VCT). VCT is a cable diagnostic utility that reports LAN cable faults and shorts using the T ime Domain ReîÂÂectometry (TDR) technology . The VCT detects and reports open and shorted cables, impedance mismatches, pair swaps, pair polarity problems, and pair skew problems of up to 64 ns at one meter accuracy . The VCT feature reduces networking and support costs through a highly manageable and controlled network system. This utility can be incorporated in the network systems sofware for ideal îÂÂeld support as well as development diagnostics. Using the Virtual Cable T ester⢠T o use the the Marvell î Virtual Cable T ester⢠utility: 1. Launch the VCT utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable T ester . 2. Click Virtual Cable T ester from the menu to display the screen below . ⢠The VCT only runs on systems with Windows î XP or Windows î 2000 operating systems. ⢠The VCT utility only tests Ethernet cables connected to Gigabit LAN port(s). ⢠The Run button on the Virtual Cable T ester⢠main window is disabled if no problem is detected on the LAN cable(s) connected to the LAN port(s). ⢠If you want the system to check the status of the LAN cable before entering the OS, enable the item Post Check LAN Cable in the BIOS Setup.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-13 5.3.3 Audio conîÂÂgurations The Realtek î ALC882M audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your computer . The software provides Jack-Sensing function, S/PDIF Out support, and interrupt capability . The ALC882M also includes the Realtek î proprietary UAJ î (Universal Audio Jack) technology for all audio ports, eliminating cable connection errors and giving users plug and play convenience. Follow the installation wizard to install the Realtek î Audio Driver from the support CD that came with the motherboard package. If the Realtek audio software is correctly installed, you will îÂÂnd the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon on the taskbar . From the taskbar , double-click on the SoundEffect icon to display the Realtek HD Audio Manager . Realtek HD Audio Manager Control settings window ConîÂÂguration options Information button Realtek HD Audio Manager T ool button Dolby î feature launch buttons Exit button Minimize button
5-14 Chapter 5: Software support Information Click the information button ( ) to display information about the audio driver version, DirectX version, audio controller , audio codec, and language setting. T ools Click the tool button ( ) to display tools for supported Dolby î applications. Dolby î feature launch buttons Click the button of the feature you want to launch. Minimize Click the minimize button ( ) to minimize the window . Exit Click the exit button ( ) to exit the Realtek HD Audio Manager . ConîÂÂguration options Click any of the tabs in this area to conîÂÂgure your audio settings. Click the arrow button ( ) to display more options.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-15 Sound Effect The Realtek î ALC882M Audio CODEC allows you to set your listening environment, adjust the equalizer , set the karaoke, or select pre-programmed equalizer settings for your listening pleasure. T o set the sound effect options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Sound Effect tab. 2. Click the shortcut buttons or the drop-down menus for options on changing the acoustic environment or adjust the equalizer to your desired settings. 3. Click to effect the Sound Effect settings and exit. Mixer The Mixer option allows you to conîÂÂgure audio output (playback) volume and audio input (record) volume. T o set the mixer options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Mixer tab. 2. T urn the volume buttons to adjust the Playback and/or Record volume. The Mixer option activates voice input from all channels by default. Make sure to set those channels to mute ( ) if you do not want voice input. 3. Make adjustments to W ave, SW Synth, Front, Rear , Subwoofer , CD volume, Mic volume, Line V olume, and Stereo mix by clicking the control tabs and dragging them up and down until you get the desired levels. 4. Click to effect the Mixer settings and exit.
5-16 Chapter 5: Software support Bass Management setting Click this tab to manage your bass settings. T o set the bass management options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Bass Management setting tab. 2. Click <M> to display the distance in meters, or <FT> to display the distance in feet. 3. Adjust the values to your desired settings by entering a numeric value in the boxes, or clicking the up/down arrow . 4. Click to test your settings. 5. Click to effect the Bass Management settings and exit. Audio I/O The Audio I/O option allows you conîÂÂgure your input/output settings. T o set the Audio I/O options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Audio I/O tab. 2. Click the drop-down menu to select the channel conîÂÂguration. 3. The control settings window displays the status of connected devices. Click for analog and digital options. 4. Click <OK> to effect the Audio I/O settings and exit
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-17 Microphone The Microphone option allows you conîÂÂgure your input/output settings and to check if your audio devices are connected properly . T o set the Microphone options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Microphone tab. 2. Click the Noise Suppression option button to reduce the static background noise when recording. 3. Click the Acoustic Echo Cancellation option button to reduce the echo from the front speakers when recording. 4. Click to effect the Microphone settings and exit. 3D Audio Demo The 3D Audio Demo option gives you a demonstration of the 3D audio feature. T o start the 3D Audio Demo: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the 3D Audio Demo tab. 2. Click the option buttons to change the sound, moving path, or environment settings. 3. Click to test your settings. 4. Click to effect the 3D Audio Demo settings and exit.
5-18 Chapter 5: Software support Designed for Dolby î Master Studio Dolby î Master Studio combines advanced audio technologies to bring you the highest-quality in audio entertainment. Enjoy true home theatre experience with the following advanced sound technologies: Dolby Prologic IIx, Dolby Headphone, Dolby Virtual Speaker , and Dolby Digital Live. Dolby î Headphone: Allows you to wear any pair of headphones and listen to music with the dramatic surround effects of a 5.1-channel audio conîÂÂguration. Dolby î Pro Logic IIx: expands any stereo audio or 5.1-channel audio for a 6.1 or 7.1-channel playback, creating a seamless, natural surround soundîÂÂeld that immerses you in the entertainment experience. Dolby î Virtual Speaker: Simulates a highly realistic 5.1-speaker surround sound listening environment using only two speakers.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-19 Using Dolby î Digital Live⢠The Dolby î Digital Live⢠technology encodes your computer âÂÂs digital audio contents to real-time Dolby î Digital streams. Using the CODEC and the Sony/ Philips Digital Interface (S/PDIF) ports on the motherboard, you can send the encoded Dolby î Digital streams to an AC-3 decoder for playback on a multi- channel speaker system. Refer to the following illustrations when converting sounds to Dolby î Digital streams. Direct or non-encoded audio in your computer passes through the AC-3 encoder . 1 2 The AC-3 encoder converts the sound into Dolby î Digital streams. Realtek î ALC882M CODEC 3 The audio CODEC processes the streams then passes it to an AC-3 decoder through the S/PDIF out port. 4 The AC-3 decoder processes the streams then plays them back on a multi-channel speaker system. T o enable the Dolby î Digital Liveâ¢: 1. Connect an AC-3 decoder to the coaxial/optical S/PDIF out port. 2. Connect the AC-3 decoder to the multi-channel speaker system. 3. Launch the Realtek HD Audio Manager by double clicking the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon on the Windows î taskbar . 4. Click the Dolby Digital Live button. Y ou can now convert your computer âÂÂs audio content to Dolby î Digital streams.
5-20 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.4 ASUS PC Probe II PC Probe II is a utility that monitors the computer âÂÂs vital components, and detects and alerts you of any problem with these components. PC Probe II senses fan rotations, CPU temperature, and system voltages, among others. Because PC Probe II is software-based, you can start monitoring your computer the moment you turn it on. With this utility , you are assured that your computer is always at a healthy operating condition. Installing PC Probe II T o install PC Probe II on your computer: 1. Place the support CD to the optical drive. The Drivers installation tab appears if your computer has an enabled Autorun feature. If Autorun is not enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the setup.exe îÂÂle from the ASUS PC Probe II folder . Double-click the setup.exe îÂÂle to start installation. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click ASUS PC Probe II. 3. Follow the screen instructions to complete installation. Launching PC Probe II Y ou can launch the PC Probe II right after installation or anytime from the Windows î desktop. T o launch the PC Probe II from the Windows î desktop, click Start > All Programs > ASUS > PC Probe II > PC Probe II v1.00.43. The PC Probe II main window appears. After launching the application, the PC Probe II icon appears in the Windows î taskbar . Click this icon to close or restore the application. Using PC Probe II Main window The PC Pr obe II main windo w a llows you to vi ew the curre nt st atu s of you r syst em and chang e the ut ility con îÂÂgurat ion. B y defa ult, the main win dow di splays the P refer enc e sect ion. You can c lose o r rest ore t he Prefer ence sec tion b y clic king o n the tr iangle on th e mai n wind ow rig ht han dle. Click to close the Preference panel
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-21 Button Function Opens the ConîÂÂguration window Opens the Report window Opens the Desktop Management Interface window Opens the Peripheral Component Interconnect window Opens the Windows Management Instrumentation window Opens the hard disk drive, memory , CPU usage window Shows/Hides the Preference section Minimizes the application Closes the application Sensor alert When a system sensor detects a problem, the main window right handle turns red, as the illustrations below show . When displayed, the monitor panel for that sensor also turns red. Refer to the Monitor panels section for details. Preferences Y ou can customize the application using the Preference section in the main window . Click the box before each preference to activate or deactivate.
5-22 Chapter 5: Software support Hardware monitor panels The hardware monitor panels display the current value of a system sensor such as fan rotation, CPU temperature, and voltages. The hardware monitor panels come in two display modes: hexagonal (large) and rectangular (small). When you check the Enable Monitoring Panel option from the Preference section, the monitor panels appear on your computer âÂÂs desktop. Ch anging the monitor panels position T o change the position of the monitor panels in the desktop, click the arrow down button of the Scheme options, then select another position from the list box. Click OK when îÂÂnished. Moving the monitor panels All monitor panels move together using a magnetic effect. If you want to detach a monitor panel from the group, click the horseshoe magnet icon. Y ou can now move or reposition the panel independently . Adjusting the sensor threshold value Y ou can adjust the sensor threshold value in the monitor panel by clicking the or buttons. Y ou can also adjust the threshold values using the ConîÂÂg window . Yo u c ann ot ad ju st the s en sor th res ho ld va lue s i n a s ma ll mon it or ing pa nel . Large display Small display Click to increase value Click to decrease value
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-23 Monitoring sensor alert The monitor panel turns red when a component value exceeds or is lower than the threshold value. Refer to the illustrations below . Large display Small display WMI browser Click to display the WMI (Windows Management Instrumentation) browser . This browser displays various Windows î management information. Click an item from the left panel to display on the right panel. Click the plus sign ( ) before WMI Information to display the available information. Y ou can enlarge or reduce the browser size by dragging the bottom right corner of the browser . DMI browser Click to display the DMI (Desktop Management Interface) browser . This browser displays various desktop and system information. Click the plus sign ( ) before DMI Information to display the available information.
5-24 Chapter 5: Software support PCI browser Click to display the PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) browser . This browser provides information on the PCI devices installed on your system. Click the plus sign ( ) before the PCI Information item to display available information. Usage The Usage browser displays real-time information on the CPU, hard disk drive space, and memory usage. Click to display the Usage browser . CPU usage The CPU tab displays real-time CPU usage in line graph representation. If the CPU has an enabled Hyper-Threading, two separate line graphs display the operation of the two logical processors. Hard disk drive space usage The Hard Disk tab displays the used and available hard disk drive space. The left panel of the tab lists all logical drives. Click a hard disk drive to display the information on the right panel. The pie chart at the bottom of the window represents the used (blue) and the available HDD space.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-25 Memory usage The Memory tab shows both used and available physical memory . The pie chart at the bottom of the window represents the used (blue) and the available physical memory . ConîÂÂguring PC Probe II Click to view and adjust the sensor threshold values. The ConîÂÂg window has two tabs: Sensor/Threshold and Preference. The Sensor/ Threshold tab enables you to activate the sensors or to adjust the sensor threshold values. The Preference tab allows you to customize sensor alerts, or change the temperature scale. Loads the default threshold values for each sensor Applies your changes Cancels or ignores your changes Lo ad s y ou r s av ed co nî gur at ion Saves your conîÂÂguration
5-26 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.5 ASUS Music Alarm This motherboard is equipped with an audio alarm clock called ASUS Music Alarm. The ASUS Music Alarm gives you a personal wake-up called with your favorite CD music when the system is off. The onboard audio CODEC supports this feature, which requires an optical drive (CD-ROM, CD-RW , or DVD-ROM). ⢠Make sure that the power cord is plugged to a grounded power source so that the system has standby power . ⢠ASUS Music Alarm only supports audio CDs. ⢠ASUS Music Alarm will not work if you installed and enabled an add-on sound card. ⢠Only IDE A T API devices from the Southbridge support this feature. Hardware setup T o set up the hardware: 1. Connect the analog audio cable from the optical drive to the 4-pin CD-In connector labeled CD on the motherboard. See section âÂÂ2.7.2 Internal connectorsâ for the connector location. 2. Connect speakers or a headphone to the Line-Out (lime-colored) port on the front or rear panel for audio output. Y ou may also connect speakers or a headphone to the output jack on the optical drive. 3. Refer to the succeeding sections to make the appropriate settings in the BIOS or in Windows î . BIOS conîÂÂguration T o enable ASUS Music Alarm in the BIOS: 1. T urn on the system. 2. During POST , press <Del> to enter BIOS setup. 3. Go to the T ools menu, then select ASUS Music Alarm . 4. Set the ASUS Music Alarm item to [Enabled]. See section âÂÂ4.7.1 ASUS Music Alarmâ for details.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-27 OS conîÂÂguration T o conîÂÂgure ASUS Music Alarm in Windows î 1. Place the support CD into the optical drive. 2. Click the Utilities tab and choose ASUS Music Alarm to install the utility . 3. Insert an audio CD into the optical drive. 4. Launch the ASUS Music Alarm application by going to Start > ASUS > ASUS Music Alarm . The main window appears. Alarm information section shows the alarm time and days Music section shows the drive letter of the chosen optical drive and the starting track number to use as music alarm Minimize button Exit button Options section shows playing options 5. Click the arrow ( ) next to Time for Next Alarm in the Alarm information section. The Alarm T ime Setting panel appears. Set the days and time of the alarm, or enable/disable the Music Alarm feature. When done, click OK. 6. Click the arrow ( ) next to Music in the Music section. The Music Selection panel appears. Select the optical storage device, then choose the starting CD track number from which you would like the music alarm to play . When done, click OK.
5-28 Chapter 5: Software support 7. Click the arrow ( ) next to Options in the Options section. The Options panel appears. Disable or select the Repeat mode, then specify the length of the alarm music to play . Set the desired volume. When done, click OK. 8. After you have îÂÂnished making all the required settings, turn off the system. Adjusting the volume T o adjust the volume while the music alarm is playing: ⢠Use the <Up> or <Down> arrow key to increase or decrease the volume. T urning off the music alarm T o turn off the music alarm: ⢠Press any key to stop playing the CD and turn off the system. ⢠While the music alarm is playing, the system wake-up features (LAN, keyboard, mouse, PCI/PCIE device, modem) are deactivated. ⢠If the system loses connection or if it does not detect any optical drive or audio CD, the ASUS Music Alarm is automatically disabled/turned off. ⢠While the music alarm is playing, the optical drive front panel functions are automatically disabled. ⢠The ASUS Music Alarm works only when the system is off.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-29 5.4 RAID conî¿gurations The motherboard comes with four Serial A T A RAID solutions: ⢠ASUS EZ-Backup. Enabled by Silicon ImageâÂÂs SiI4723 controller , ASUS EZ-Backup provides ready-to-go hardware RAID for plug-and play RAID 1 and easy-to-conîÂÂgure RAID 0 sets of two hard disk drives ⢠Intel î ICH7R Southbridge RAID provides RAID level 5 support for three or more hard disk drives. ⢠Cross-RAID allows you to build a RAID 10 set through a cross-conîÂÂguration of ASUS EZ-Backup and Intel î ICH7R. ⢠JMicron î RAID. Enabled by JMicron î JMB363 controller , JMicron î RAID extends the advantages of software RAID beyond internal hard disk drives to an external disk or external, port-multiplier enabled enclosure While individually the RAID implementations offer advantages for speciîÂÂc applications, as a whole, this set of tools provides ultimate îÂÂexibility for every environment. Refer to the following RAID deîÂÂnitions for details. RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conîÂÂguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 conîÂÂguration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity . The RAID 5 conîÂÂguration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. RAID 10* is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 10* conîÂÂguration you get all the beneîÂÂts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conîÂÂgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. *T o build a RAID 10 set, you need to cross-conîÂÂgure Intel î ICH7R with Silicon Image î , which controls the EZ_RAID connectors for the EZ Backup feature. See section âÂÂ5.4.5 Cross-RAID conîÂÂgurationâ for details.
5-30 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.2 Intel î RAID conîÂÂgurations This motherboard supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10* (0 1) and Intel î Matrix Storage conîÂÂgurations for Serial A T A hard disks drives through the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge chip. 5.4.1 Installing Serial A T A hard disks The motherboard supports Serial A T A hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array . T o install the SA T A hard disks for a RAID conîÂÂguration: 1. Install the SA T A hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SA T A signal cables. 3. Connect a SA T A power cable to the power connector on each drive . See Chapter 4 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy îÂÂrst the RAID driver from the support CD to a îÂÂoppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ5.6 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. Intel î Matrix Storage. The Intel î Matrix Storage technology supported by the ICH7R chip allows you to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10* function to improve both system performance and data safety . Y ou can also combine two RAID sets to get higher performance, capacity , or fault tolerance provided by the difference RAID function. For example, RAID 0 and RAID 1 set can be created by using only two identical hard disk drives. *T o build a RAID 10 set, you need to cross-conîÂÂgure Intel î ICH7R with Silicon Image î , which controls the EZ_RAID connectors for the EZ Backup feature. See section âÂÂ5.4.5 Cross-RAID conîÂÂgurationâ for details. Setting the RAID item in BIOS Y ou must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set(s). T o do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST . 2. �o to th e Ma in Men u, se le ct IDE C on îÂÂgu rat ion , th en pre ss <E nte r>. 3. Select the item ConîÂÂgure SA T A As, then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. 4. Select RAID from the ConîÂÂgure SA T A As item options, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the item Onboard Serial-A T A BOOTROM, press <Enter>, then select Enabled from the options. 6. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-31 Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility The Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10 (RAID 0 1), and RAID 5 set(s) from Serial A T A hard disk drives that are connected to the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge. T o enter the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility: 1. Install all the Serial A T A hard disk drives. 2. T urn on the system. 3. During POST , press <Ctrl I> to display the utility main menu. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None deî¿ned. Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu The navigation keys at the bottom of the screen allow you to move through the menus and select the menu options. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen.
5-32 Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) T o create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 0(Stripe), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to conîÂÂgure as RAID. This pop-up screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume0 RAID0(Stripe) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ SELECT DISKS ] [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight a drive, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-33 6. Use the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 0 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu, or <N> to go back to the Create V olume menu. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing.
5-34 Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) T o create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 1(Mirror), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Capacity item is highlighted, key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 5. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A XX.X GB Create Volume WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 6. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to main menu or <N> to go back to Create V olume menu.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-35 Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) T o create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume5 RAID5(Parity) Select Disks 64KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select 2. Enter a name for the RAID 5 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 5(Parity), then press <Enter>. 4. The Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to conîÂÂgure as RAID. The following pop-up screen appears. [ SELECT DISKS ] Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete
5-36 Chapter 5: Software support 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the drive you want to set, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection. 6. When the Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 5 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create V olume menu. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter> when the Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-37 Deleting a RAID set T ake caution when deleting a RAID set. Y ou will lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set. T o delete a RAID set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 2. Delete RAID V olume, then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set you want to delete, then press <Del>. This window appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ DELETE VOLUME MENU ] Name Level Drives Capacity Status Bootable Volume0 RAIDX(xxxxx) X XXX.XGB Normal Yes [ HELP ] Deleting a volume will destroy the volume data on the drive(s) and cause any member disks to become available as non-RAID disks. WARNING: EXISTING DATA WITHIN THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE. [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<Del>]-Delete Volume 3. Press <Y> to delete the RAID set and return to the utility main menu; otherwise, press <N> to return to the Delete V olume menu. ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST! Are you sure you want to delete volume âÂÂVolumeXâÂÂ? (Y/N): [ DELETE VOLUME VERIFICATION ]
5-38 Chapter 5: Software support Exiting the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager utility T o exit the utility: 1. From the utility main menu, select 4. Exit, then press <Enter>. This window appears. Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N): [ CONFIRM EXIT ] 2. Press <Y> to exit or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. Resetting Disks to Non-RAID Take cauti on befo re you reset a RAID volum e HD D to n on-RAID . Rese tting a RAID volum e HDD d eletes all in ternal RAID stru cture on the drive. T o reset a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. From the utility main menu, select 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID, then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the RAID set drive you want to reset, then press <Space> to select. 3. Press <Enter> to reset the RAID set drive. A conîÂÂrmation message appears. 4. Press <Y> to reset the drive or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. [ RESET RAID DATA ] Resetting RAID data will remove internal RAID structures from the selected RAID disks. By removing these structures, the drive will revert back to a non-RAID disk. WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk Select the disks that should be reset. [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-39 Resetting a RAID set hard disks drive Take cauti on befo re you reset a RAID volum e HD D to n on-RAID . Rese tting a RAID volum e HDD d eletes all in ternal RAID stru cture on the drive. T o reset a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. From the utility main menu, select [3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID], then press <Enter> to display the following screen. Resetting RAID data will remove the internal RAID structures from the selected RAID disks. By removing these structures the drive will revert back to a Non-RAID disk. [ RESET RAID DATA ] WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.0GB Member Disk 1 STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.0GB Member Disk Select the disk that should be reset [ ]-Previous/Next [Space]-Selects [Enter]-Selection Complete 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the RAID set drive you want to reset, then press <Space> to select. 3. Press <Enter> to reset the RAID set drive. A conîÂÂrmation window appears. 4. Press <Y> to reset the drive; otherwise, press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5. Follow steps 2 to 4 to select and reset other RAID set drives.
5-40 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.3 JMicron î RAID ConîÂÂguration The JMicron î Serial A T A controller allows you to conîÂÂgure RAID 0 and RAID 1 sets on the external Serial A T A hard disk drives. Before creating a RAID set Prepare the following items: 1. T wo HDDs, preferably with the same model and capacity . 2. A write-enabled îÂÂoppy disk 3. Microsoft î Windows î OS installation disk (Windows 2000/XP/2003) 4. Motherboard support CD with JMB363 driver Complete the following steps before you create a RAID set: 1. Install the external Serial A T A hard disk drives (HDDs) on your system. 2. Set the JMicron Controller Mode item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Devices ConîÂÂgurationâ for details. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2005, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conî¿gure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Onboard PCIE GbE LAN_1 [Enabled] Onboard PCIE GbE LAN_2 [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] JMicron SATA/PATA Controller [Enabled] JMicron Controller Mode [RAID] JMicron SATA/RAID BOOTROM [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] 3. Enter the JMB363 RAID BIOS utility to set up your RAID conîÂÂguration. 4. Create a JMB363 RAID driver disk for Windows î OS installation. See section âÂÂ5.5 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. 5. Install the JMB363 driver after the Windows î OS had been installed. Options Enabled Disabled
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-41 Entering the JMB363 RAID BIOS utility 1. During POST , press <Ctrl-J> to enter the JBM363 RAID BIOS menu. 2. The main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu appears. 3. Use the arrow keys to move the color bar and navigate through the items. Creating a RAID set 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Create RAID Disk Drive using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. J M ic r o n T e c h no l o g y C o r p . P C I -t o - S A TA I I /I D E R AI D C on t r o l le r B IO S v 0. 9 7 Co pyri ght (C ) 20 04- 2005 JM icr on T ech nol ogy ht tp: //w ww. j mic ron .co m HDD0 : HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB Non-RAID HDD1 : HDS722516DLA380 164 GB Non-RAID Press <Ctrl-J> to enter RAID Setup Utility... [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving J M ic r o n T e c h no l o g y C o r p . P C I -t o - S A TA I I /I D E R AI D C on t r o l le r B IO S v 0. 9 7 [ TAB]-Switch Window [ âÂÂâÂÂ]-Select Item [ENTER]-Action [ESC]-Exit [Hard Disk Drive List] Model Name Capacity Type/Status HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB Non-RAID HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB Non-RAID [RAID Disk Drive List] [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving
5-42 Chapter 5: Software support 2. When the Level item is highlighted, use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set that you want to create. 3. When the Disks item is highlighted, use the up/down arrow key to highlight an HDD that you want to belong to the RAID set, then press the space bar to conîÂÂrm selection. Repeat the process until the HDDs are selected. A selected HDD shows a sign before it. 4. Key in the RAID volume capacity . Use the up/down arrow to choose the block size. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . [Create New RAID] Name : JRAID Level: 0-Stripe Disks: Select Disk Block: 128 KB Size : 319 GB Conî¿rm Creation [Create New RAID] Name : JRAID Level: 1-Mirror Disks: Select Disk Block: N/A Size : 159 GB Conî¿rm Creation [Hard Disk Drive List] Model Name Capacity Type/Status HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 XXX GB Non-RAID HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 XXX GB Non-RAID [Create New RAID] Name : JRAID Level: 0-Stripe Disks: Select Disk Block: 128 KB Size : 319 GB Conî¿rm Creation
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-43 5. When done, press <Enter> to conîÂÂrm the creation of the RAID set. A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. Pressing <Y> deletes all the data in the HDDs. 6. The following screen appears, displaying the relevant information about the RAID set you created. [RAID Disk Drive List] M od el N a me R AI D L e v el Ca p ac it y St at u s M e mb e r s (H DD x) RDD0: JRAID 0-Stripe XXX GB Normal 01 J M ic r o n T e c h no l o g y C o r p . P C I -t o - S A TA I I /I D E R AI D C on t r o l le r B IO S v 0. 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mo del Na me C apa cit y Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB Non-RAID HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB Non-RAID [RAID Disk Drive List] [Create New RAID] Name: JRAID Level: 0-Stripe Disks: Select Disk Block: 128 KB Size : 319 GB Conî¿rm Creation Create RAID on the selected HDD (Y/N)? Y
5-44 Chapter 5: Software support Deleting a RAID set 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Delete RAID Disk Drive using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. 2. Use the space bar to select the RAID set you want to delete. A selected set shows a sign before it. Press the <Del> key to delete the set. 3. A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. Pressing <Y> deletes all the data in the HDDs. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving J M ic r o n T e c h no l o g y C o r p . P C I -t o - S A TA I I /I D E R AI D C on t r o l le r B IO S v 0. 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mo del Na me C apa cit y Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB RAID Inside HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB RAID Inside [RAID Disk Drive List] Mo d e l Na me R AI D Le ve l Ca pa ci ty St a tu s M em be rs (H D D x) R DD 0: JRAID 0-Stripe XXX GB Normal 01 [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving ALL DATA ON THE RAID WILL BE LOST!! ARE YOU SURE TO DELETE (Y/N)? Y [ TAB]-Switch Window [ âÂÂâÂÂ]-Select Item [ENTER]-Action [ESC]-Exit
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-45 Resetting disks to non-RAID T o reset disks to non-RAID: 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Revert HDD to non-RAID using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. 2. Use the space bar to select the HDD that you want to reset to non-RAID. A selected HDD shows a sign before it. 3. A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving Pressing <Y> deletes all the data in the HDD. An HDD that has been previously conîÂÂgured as part of another RAID set in another platform is called a broken RAID HDD. When you install a broken RAID HDD, you cannot select this HDD when conîÂÂguring a RAID set through the JMB363 utility . If you still want to use this broken RAID HDD as part of the RAID set conîÂÂgured through the JMB363, you may do so by resetting the disk to non-RAID. Y ou will, however , lose all data and previous RAID conîÂÂgurations.
5-46 Chapter 5: Software support Repairing a Mirror conîÂÂict A Mirror conîÂÂict occurs when one or both disks in a RAID 1 (Mirror) conîÂÂguration are unplugged from the system, then plugged in again. Since both disks contain exactly the same data, the system will be unable to determine which of the two is the source drive. This option allows you to set the source drive and rebuild the Mirror drive according to the contents of the source drive. T o repair a Mirror conîÂÂict: 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. 2. Use the space bar to select the HDD that you want to set as source drive. The selected HDD shows a sign before it. 3. Using the <T AB>, move to the RAID Disk Drive List menu and highlight the RAID set that you want to rebuild. Press <Del> to begin rebuilding the Mirror conîÂÂguration. A status bar at the bottom of the screen shows the progress of the rebuilding. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving J M ic r o n T e c h no l o g y C o r p . P C I -t o - S A TA I I /I D E R AI D C on t r o l le r B IO S v 0. 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mo del Na me C apa cit y Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB RAID Inside HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB RAID Inside [RAID Disk Drive List] Mo d e l Na me R AI D Le ve l Ca pa ci ty St a tu s M em be rs (H D D x) RDD0: JRAID 1-Mirror XXX GB Rebuild 01 [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving Rebuilding... 01%, please wait...
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-47 Saving the settings and exiting setup When you have îÂÂnished, highlight Save & Exit Setup using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter> to save the current RAID conîÂÂguration and exit the JMB363 RAID BOS utility . A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N> to return to the JMB RAID BIOS menu.
5-48 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.4 Silicon Image î RAID conîÂÂguration The Silicon Image î 4723 Serial A T A controller allows you to build RAID sets on the ASUS EZ-Backup Serial A T A hard disk drives. About ASUS EZ-Backup ASUS EZ-Backup is an ASUS exclusive feature that allows you to build a RAID set easily . Without any conîÂÂguration or BIOS setting required, you can create a RAID 1 set by simply plugging in two Serial A T A hard disks to the onboard EZ_RAID connectors. Simply install the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager , and you are ready to mirror your data. ASUS EZ-Backup secures your data and saves you from complex conîÂÂgurations, troublesome setups, and complicated BIOS settings. Refer to the succeeding sections to conîÂÂgure other RAID sets. RAID modes supported ASUS EZ-Backup supports the following RAID modes: 1. SAFE / RAID 1 (Data mirroring) is storage policy in which all data are stored in duplicate on separate drives to protect against data loss due to drive failure. One drive mirrors the other at all times. This mode is equivalent to RAID 1. Every write operation goes to both drives. Safe provides the highest level of data protection, but halves the amount of storage space because all data must be stored twice. If one drive fails, the Safe volume is in a vulnerable state because its mirrored hard drive is inaccessible. When the ofîÂÂine drive comes back online, the îÂÂrmware begins a rebuild process immediately to restore data redundancy . A message box appears in the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager graphical user interface (GUI) to notify you that a rebuild is in progress. Although the volume remains available during the rebuild process, the volume is susceptible to data loss through damage to the remaining drive until redundancy is restored at the end of the rebuild and veriîÂÂcation process. Host access takes precedence over the rebuild process. If you continue to use the Safe volume during the rebuild, the rebuild process will take a longer time to complete. T o implement the Safe storage policy , the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager creates one volume. One hard drive mirrors the other . 2. F AST / RAID 0 (Data striping) is a storage policy in which I/O processing is balanced evenly in a method known as striping. This mode equivalent to RAID 0. Striping increases storage operation speed because each portion of data is divided into segments that are written to different disks simultaneously . Fast offers the best performance, but no data redundancy because there is no way to retrieve or reconstruct data on a failed drive. T o implement the Fast storage policy , the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager creates a single volume that is striped across both hard drives.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-49 Building a RAID 1 set for the îÂÂrst time The ASUS EZ-Backup advantage is that you can build a RAID 1 set without any jumper or BIOS setting. When creating a RAID 1 set for the îÂÂrst time, you can follow these simple steps. 1. Prepare two Serial A T A hard disk drives (HDDs). Plug one end of the Serial A T A cable to the rear interface on each drive and plug the other end of the cable to the motherboard connectors labeled EZ_RAID1 and EZ_RAID2 (colored light orange). Refer to section âÂÂ2.7.2 Internal connectorsâ for the location of the connectors. For best results, use Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s hard disk drives listed in the EZ-Backup compatibility list. Visit the ASUS website at www.asus.com for details. 2. Connect a Serial A T A power cable or a 4-pin legacy power connector from the power supply unit to the rear power connector on each drive. Using both the SA T A power cable and 4-pin power connector simultaneously will cause damage to the system. 3. Install the operating system. 4. Install the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager utility from the support CD that came with the motherboard package. 5. Reboot the computer . 3. BIG is storage policy in which multiple physical drives are concatenated and treated as one large volume. This conîÂÂguration allows you to increase virtual volume size beyond the capacity of individual drives. Big provides the maximum amount of storage space, but no additional performance or data redundancy . T o implement the Big storage policy , the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager concatenates both hard drives into a single volume. . Before creating a RAID set Prepare the following items: 1. T wo Serial A T A hard disk drives (HDDs)., preferably with the same model and capacity . 2. Motherboard support CD with ASUS EZ-Backup Manager
5-50 Chapter 5: Software support Creating a Big/Fast RAID set for the îÂÂrst time 1. Set the EZ-Backup jumper mode. Refer to the jumper settings below for the respective RAID modes supported. ⢠For best results, use Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s hard disk drives listed in the EZ-Backup compatibility list. Visit the ASUS website at www.asus.com for details. ⢠The total RAID disk volume size should be less than 2.1 T erabytes (TB). If you do not change the jumper setting on îÂÂrst installation, the system applies the default RAID mode, which is RAID 1. 2. Prepare two Serial A T A hard disk drives (HDDs). Plug one end of the Serial A T A cable to the rear interface on each drive and plug the other end of the cable to the motherboard connectors labeled EZ_RAID1 and EZ_RAID2 (colored light orange). Refer to section âÂÂ2.7.2 Internal connectorsâ for the location of the connectors. 3. Connect a Serial A T A power cable or a 4-pin legacy power connector from the power supply unit to the rear power connector on each drive. Using both the SA T A power cable and 4-pin power connector simultaneously will cause damage to the system. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE RAID Setting RA ID _S EL RAID1 (Default) 1 BIG mode 1 [Fast mode] 1 RAID0 [Safe mode]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-51 6. Install the operating system. 7. Install the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager utility from the support CD that came with the motherboard package. Changing RAID modes T o change from one RAID mode to another , follow steps 1, 4, and 5 of the previous section, âÂÂCreating a Big/Fast RAID set for the îÂÂrst time.â RAID mode change will destroy any data on the hard disk drives. Backup existing data before changing RAID modes. 4. Enter the BIOS setup during POST . Go to Advanced menu > DH Feature page. Set the EZ Backup RAID Mode Change item to Enabled. Make sure you have made the above BIOS setting.If you changed the jumper settings but did not enable the EZ Backup RAID Mode Change, the system applies the default RAID mode, which is RAID 1. 5. Press <F10> to save and exit. The system will restart. The following message appears after you exit the BIOS utility . EZ Backup RAID Mode will change. Press F1 to continue.
5-52 Chapter 5: Software support Using the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager After rebooting the computer and entering Windows î again, you will îÂÂnd an icon shortcut for the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager utility on your desktop or taskbar . Launching the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager T o launch the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager , double-click on your desktop or on the taskbar . Y ou may also go to Start > Programs > EzBackup > EzBackupManager. Status window The ASUS EZ-Backup Manager status window allows you to monitor the devices connected to the host computer . ConîÂÂgure pop-ups Serial number Drive status and information Capacity information V olume information Event log Specify îÂÂrmware Refresh button Quit button When you create a RAID 10 set through a cross conîÂÂguration, you cannot use the EZ-Backup Manager utility to view the status of hard disks installed on the EZ_RAID1 and EZ_RAID2 connectors. Screen captures shown in the section are provided for your reference only , and may change any time without notice.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-53 Scan Devices. Refreshes the information shown on the status window . Change Connection. Opens a dialog box that allows you to change remote connection settings. Exit. Quits the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager . File menu The File menu allows you to change the password, scan devices, change connection, and exit the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager . Change Password. Opens a dialog box that allows you to change the default password, admin. T o change this, key in a new password, then retype the new password. Press <OK> to set. Serial number . Displays the serial number of the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager . Drive status and information. Displays the current status and serial number of each drive member of the RAID set. Below is a list of possible drive states: 1. Normal 2. Rebuilding 3. V erifying 4. Unplugged 5. Needs rebuild 6. New drive 7. Wrong slot 8. Use bigger drive Capacity information. Displays the maximum capacity of each drive member of the RAID set. V olume information. Shows the RAID mode, total volume of the RAID set, and maximum capacity of each drive member of the RAID set.
5-54 Chapter 5: Software support Event log. Click this button to display the record of events for storage devices installed. Specify îÂÂrmware. Click this button to view the current îÂÂrmware version or to update the îÂÂrmware. ConîÂÂgure pop-ups. Click this button to open a window that allows you to enable or disable pop-up display , and specify the number of seconds for the pop-ups to remain on screen. Edit menu The File menu allows you to conîÂÂgure pop-ups, view event logs, and view/update the current îÂÂrmware.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-55 Partitioning volumes Y ou need to partition the hard disk drive volumes for the operating system before you can store/backup data on the drive. Before partitioning volumes, back up your data and delete any previously deîÂÂned partition. 3. Under Storage, select Disk Management. The Windows î Disk Manager opens. T o partition volumes: 1. Boot your computer and enter the Windows î operating system. 2. Right-click My Computer on your desktop. Select Manage from the pop-up window .
5-56 Chapter 5: Software support The disk number on Windows Disk Manager may not be the same as the disk number shown on the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager . Make sure you select the correct disk by checking the total disk capacity information. 5. Right-click the diskâÂÂs unallocated space, then select New Partition . 4. Select the disk you want to partition. The screen captures in this section are provided for your reference only . The appearance of the screen and items in it may vary , depending on the operating system you installed.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-57 6. The Partition Wizard opens. Click Next to start the partition process. 7. Select the type of partition you want to create. Click Next. 8. Specify your desired partition size. The default partition size is the entire volume. Click Next.
5-58 Chapter 5: Software support 9. Assign a drive letter or drive path to the partition. Click Next. 1 1. The New Partition Wizard displays the îÂÂle system settings. Make sure the settings are correct. Click Finish to create the partition; otherwise, click Back to make the necessary changes. 10. Name and format the partition. Click Next.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-59 Rebuilding a hard disk drive ASUS EZ-Backup will rebuild a RAID 1 set after a failed hard disk drive is replaced with a functioning HDD, or the mirror becomes unsynchronized when a working hard disk drive is removed, then returned. This function applies only to a RAID 1 (SAFE) set. The following message pops up when a hard disk drive is unplugged: T o rebuild: 1. Plug in the Serial A T A cable to the available EZ_RAID connector . 2. Rebuilding starts. The Box Status cell displays the rebuilding progress. Note that the box is colored orange. 3. When done, the following message pops up. Click OK
5-60 Chapter 5: Software support 4. When done, click Refresh to update the information. If rebuilding is successful, the status displays Normal and the box color changes to green.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-61 5.4.5 Cross-RAID ConîÂÂguration: Creating a RAID 10 set with ASUS EZ-Backup and Intel ICH7R î A RAID 10 set requires four HDDs. The onboard RAID controller on the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge, however , controlls only three Serial A T A connectors. T o build a RAID 10 set, you need to cross-conîÂÂgure Intel î ICH7R with Silicon Image î , which controls the EZ_RAID connectors for the EZ-Backup feature. Refer to the succeeding sections to build a RAID 10 set. Hardware setup 1. Install one Serial A T A HDD on the motherboard connector labeled EZ_RAID1. 2. Install three Serial HDDs on the motherboard connectors labled SA T A1, SA T A3, and SA T A4. EZ Backup jumper setting and BIOS configuration For information on EZ-Backup jumper setting and BIOS conîÂÂguration, see section âÂÂ5.4.4 Silicon Image RAID conîÂÂguration.â 1. After installing the Serial A T A hard disks, set the jumper setting to the default RAID 1 mode. 2. T urn the system on, and enter the BIOS setup during POST . Go to Advanced menu > DH Feature page. Set the EZ Backup RAID Mode Change item to Enabled (if the jumper setting has been changed). 3. Press <F10> to save and exit. The system will restart.
5-62 Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 10 set using the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility T o create a RAID 10 set: 1. T urn on the system. 2. During POST , press <Ctrl I> to display the utility main menu. 3. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume10 RAID10(RAID0 1) Select Disks 128KB XXX.X GB Create Volume [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select 4. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 5. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 10(RAID0 1), then press <Enter>. 6. When the Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 10 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-63 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want then press <Enter> when the Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create V olume menu. 10. The main menu appears as follows after you have created the RAID 10 set. The HDD connected to the EZ_RAID connector is identiîÂÂed as âÂÂExternal Disk.â Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.1.2.1002 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: ID Name Level Strip Size Status Bootable 0 Volume0 RAID10(RAID0 1) XXKB XXX.XX GB Normal Yes Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Member Disk (0) 1 External Disk 0 XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Member Disk (0) 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Member Disk (0) 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Member Disk (0) [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu [ MAIN MENU ] When you create a RAID 10 set through a cross conîÂÂguration, you cannot use the EZ-Backup Manager utility to view the status of hard disks installed on the EZ_RAID1 and EZ_RAID2 connectors. Intel î Matrix Storage cannot read the hard disk drive information on the ASUS EZ-Backup connectors.
5-64 Chapter 5: Software support 5.5.2 Creating a RAID driver disk in Windows î T o create a RAID driver disk in Windows î : 1. Start Windows î . 2. Place the motherboard support CD into the optical drive. 3. Go to the Make Disk menu, then click Intel ICH7R 32/64 bit RAID Driver Disk to create an Intel î ICH7R RAID driver disk or the Make JMicron JMB36X 32/64-bit RAID Driver to create a JMicron JMB363 RAID driver disk. 4. Insert a îÂÂoppy disk into the îÂÂoppy disk drive. 5. Follow succeeding screen instructions to complete the process. Write-protect the îÂÂoppy disk to avoid computer virus infection. 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk A îÂÂoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000/XP and later operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. Y ou do not need to create a RAID driver disk if you will create a Safe, Big, or Fast RAID set through the ASUS EZ-Backup. 5.5.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS T o create a RAID driver disk without entering the OS: 1. Boot your computer . 2. Press <Del> during POST to enter the BIOS setup utility . 3. Set the optical drive as the primary boot device. 4. Insert the support CD into the optical drive. 5. Save changes and exit BIOS. 6. Press any key when the system prompts âÂÂPress any key to boot from the optical drive.â 7. When the menu appears, press <1> to create a RAID driver disk. 8. Insert a formatted îÂÂoppy disk into the îÂÂoppy drive then press <Enter>. 9. Follow succeeding screen instructions to complete the process.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-65 T o install the RAID driver: 1. During the OS installation, the system prompts you to press the F6 key to install third-party SCSI or RAID driver . 2. Press <F6> then insert the îÂÂoppy disk with RAID driver into the îÂÂoppy disk drive. 3. When prompted to select the SCSI adapter to install, make sure you select Intel(R) 82801GH/GM SA T A RAID Controller (Desktop ICH7R/DH) and JMicron JMB363. 4. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation.
5-66 Chapter 5: Software support
6 This chapter tells how to install A TI î CrossFire⢠graphics cards to avail of A TIâÂÂs Multi-Video Processing technology . ATI î CrossFire⢠technology support
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary 6 6.1 Overview ....................................................................................... 6-1 6.2 Installing CrossFire⢠graphics cards ....................................... 6-2 6.3 Software information ................................................................... 6-5
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 6-1 6.1 Overview The motherboard supports the A TI î CrossFire⢠technology that allows you to install multi-graphics processing units (GPU) graphics cards. Follow the installation procedures in this section. 6.1.1 Requirements ⢠CrossFire⢠Edition graphics card (Master) ⢠CrossFireâ¢-ready graphics card (Slave) ⢠CrossFireâ¢-ready motherboard, such as the ASUS P5W DH Deluxe motherboard. ⢠Make sure that your power supply unit (PSU) can provide at l east the minimum power required by your system. See âÂÂ14. Power connectorsâ on page 2-40 for details. 6.1.2 Before you begin Uninstall other graphics card drivers in your system T o uninstall other graphics card drivers: 1. Close all current applications. 2. Go to Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs. 3. Select your current graphics card driver/s. 4. Select Add/Remove. 5. Restart your system. ⢠Visit the ATI website or download the Radeon î îÂÂX850îÂÂCrossîÂÂreâ¢î EditionîÂÂUserâÂÂsîÂÂGuideîÂÂfromîÂÂtheîÂÂsupportîÂÂCDîÂÂforîÂÂdetailedîÂÂhardwareî requirements and installation procedures. ⢠The ATI CrossFire⢠technology supports only the following operating systems: - Windows î XP 32-bit (Home or Professional) with Service Pack 2 (SP2) - Windows î XP Professional 64-bit Edition. ⢠Make sure that your graphics card driver supports the ATI î CrossFire⢠Technology. Download the latest driver from the ATI website (www.ati.com) ⢠The maximum resolution of Radeon⢠X850 CrossFire⢠Edition is 1600 x 1200 at 65 MHz when you use DVI output.
6-2 Chapter 6: A TI î MVP technology support Slave graphics card Master graphics card 2. Insert the CrossFire⢠Edition (Master) graphics card into the PCI Express x16 orange slot. Make sure that the card is properly seated on the slot. 6.2 Installing CrossFire⢠graphics cards Before ins talling a CrossFire⢠system, refer to the user guide that came with the A TI î CrossFire⢠Edition graphics card. T o install the graphics cards: 1. Prepare one CrossFire⢠Edition (Master) graphics card and one CrossFireâ¢-ready (Slave) graphics card.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 6-3 3. Insert the CrossFireâ¢-ready (Slave) graphics card into the PCI Express x16 black slot. Make sure that the card is properly seated on the slot. 4. Connect an auxiliary power source from the power supply to the graphics cards.
6-4 Chapter 6: A TI î MVP technology support 6. Connect the other end of the external cable to the Slave graphics card. 7. Connect the loose end to the corresponding port on your monitor . 5. Connect one end of the external cable to the Master graphics card. 7 6
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 6-5 6.3 Software information 6.3.1 Installing the device drivers Refer to the documentation that came with your graphics card package to install the device drivers. The A TI CrossFire⢠technology supports only the following operating systems: ⢠Windows î XP 32-bit (Home or Professional) with Service Pack 2 (SP2) ⢠Windows î XP Professional 64-bit Edition. 1. T urn on your system and log in with administrator rights. 2. Windows î auto-detects the CrossFire⢠graphics cards and displays the Found New Hardware Wizard window . Click Cancel . 3. Place the CrossFire⢠installation CD in your optical drive and install drivers from the opening menu. 4. Click Next to continue from the installation window that appears. 5. Read the License Agreement, then click Y es .
6-6 Chapter 6: A TI î MVP technology support 6. Select the components that you want to install, then click Next. Setup prepares the installation wizard that will guide you to setup process. Windows automatically conîÂÂgures the A TI Catalyst Control Center . The status windows indicates the progress of the installation. 7. The Setup Complete window appears, indicating that the driver îÂÂles have been copied to your computer . Click Y es to restart your computer now or No to restart later 8. Click Finish. ⢠Select Express to install the HydraVision⢠multi-monitor and desktop management software, as well as the A TI driver . ⢠Select Custom to individually choose desired software components.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 6-7 6.3.2 Using the Catalyst⢠Control Center The Catalyst⢠Control Center allows you to access display features of the A TI hardware and software you installed. Use this application to adjust your graphic settings, enable/disable connected devices, and change your desktop orientation. Launching the Catalyst⢠Control Center There are several ways to launch the Catalyst⢠Control Center: ⢠On the Windows î task bar , click Start > A TI Catalyst⢠Control Center > Catalyst⢠Control Center ⢠Double-click the Catalyst⢠Control Center desktop shortcut. ⢠On the Windows î task bar , double- click the Catalyst⢠Control Center icon.
6-8 Chapter 6: A TI î MVP technology support The Catalyst⢠Control Center Dialog Box View The Catalyst⢠Control Center provides two views: ⢠Standard - simple view with wizards for beginners ⢠Advance - allows advanced users to access and conîÂÂgure the complete features of the software Set to Advance view to enable the CrossFire⢠function.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 6-9 T o enable CrossFireâ¢: 1. Set the view to Advance. 2. Click the CrossîÂÂre⢠item in �raphics Settings. 3. In the CrossFire⢠Settings dialog, tick the box opposite Enable CrossFire⢠. 4. Click OK to effect the setting. 2 3 4 Hotkeys Click the Hotkeys tab on the Catalyst⢠Control Center to access the Hotkeys Manager , which allows you to create key combinations as shortcuts for performing certain functions quickly .
6-10 Chapter 6: A TI î MVP technology support ProîÂÂles Click the ProîÂÂles tab on the Catalyst⢠Control Center to access the ProîÂÂles Manager , which allows you to create customized environments for your desktop, video, and 3D applications. Preferences Click the Preferences tab on the Catalyst⢠Control Center to select a language, restore defaults, change skins, or enable/disable the System T ray icon.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 6-1 1 Help Click the Help tab on the Catalyst⢠Control Center to access the online help system, generate a Problem Report, and get the Catalyst⢠Control Center version information.
6-12 Chapter 6: A TI î MVP technology support
A CPU features The Appendix describes the CPU features and technologies that the motherboard supports.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary A A.1 Intel î EM64T .................................................................................. A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) ........................ A-1 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading T echnology ........................................... A-3
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe A.1 Intel î EM64T Using the Intel î EM64T feature T o use the Intel î EM64T feature: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Intel î EM64T . 2. Install a 64-bit operating system (Windows î XP Professional x64 Edition or Windows î Server 2003 x64 Edition). 3. Install the 64-bit drivers for the motherboard components and devices from the support CD. 4. Install the 64-bit drivers for expansion cards or add-on devices, if any . A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) ⢠The motherboard is fully compatible with Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors running on 32-bit operating systems. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EM64T . Y ou can download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the ASUS website (www .asus.com/ support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS îÂÂle. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www .intel.com for more information on the EM64T feature. ⢠Vi sit www .mi cro sof t.c om fo r mo re inf orm atio n o n W ind ows î 64-bit OS. Refe r to t he expa nsion card or add-o n devi ce(s ) docu mentati on, or visit the rela ted we bsite, to ver ify if the ca rd/dev ice suppor ts a 64 -bit s ystem. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EIST . Y ou can download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the ASUS website (www .asus.com/ support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www .intel.com for more information on the EIST feature. A.2.1 System requirements Before using EIST , check your system if it meets the following requirements: ⢠In tel î Pentium î 4 processor with EIST support ⢠BIOS îÂÂle with EIST support ⢠Operating system with EIST support (Windows î XP SP2/Windows î Server 2003 SP1/Linux 2.6 kernel or later versions)
A-2 Appendix: CPU features A.2.2 Using the EIST T o use the EIST feature: 1. Tur n o n t he com put er , the n e nte r th e B IOS S et up. 2. Go to the Ad van ced M en u, hig hli gh t CPU Co nîÂÂg ur ati on , then press <Enter>. 3. Set the Intel(R) SpeedStep T echnology item to [Automatic], then press <Enter>. See page 4-25 for details. 4. Pre ss <F1 0> to sav e yo ur cha nge s an d e xit t he BI OS set up . 5. Aft er the co mpu ter r es tar ts, ri gh t cli ck on a bl ank sp ac e on the d es kto p, the n se lec t P rop er ti es fro m th e p op- up me nu . 6. Whe n t he Dis pla y P ro pe rti es wi ndo w a ppe ar s, cl ick t he Sc ree n Sa ver ta b. 7. Cli ck the Po wer bu tt on on th e Mo nit or pow er s ect ion t o ope n t he Po wer Op tio ns P rop ert ie s win dow . 8 . O n t h e P o we r sc h e me s se c t io n , c l i ck , t he n se l e ct a ny o pt i o n except Home/OfîÂÂce Desktop or Always On. 9. Cli ck App ly , th en cl ic k O K . 10 . C los e th e D isp la y Pro per tie s wi ndo w. Af ter yo u a dj us t t he po we r s che me, th e C PU int er na l f req ue nc y s lig htl y de cre ase s w he n the CP U lo adi ng is lo w. The screen displays and procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with Hyper-Threading T echnology . ⢠Hy per -Thr ead ing Te chn ol ogy is sup por ted und er Win dow s î XP/2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only . Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Installing Windows î XP Service Pack 1 or later version is recommended. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading T echnology , visit www.intel. com/info/hyperthreading. Using the Hyper-Threading T echnology T o use the Hyper-Threading T echnology: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup. Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading T echnology is set to Enabled. Se e p age 4- 25 for details. The BIOS item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 3. Restart the computer .
A-4 Appendix: CPU features
ii E2557 First Edition V1 May 2006 Copyright é 2006 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiîÂÂed or altered, unless such repair , modiîÂÂcation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiîÂÂcation or explanation and to the ownersâ beneîÂÂt, without intent to infringe.
iii Contents Notices ........................................................................................................ vii Safety information .................................................................................... viii About this guide ......................................................................................... ix P5W DH Deluxe speciîÂÂcations summary ................................................. xi Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features ............................................................................ 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ........................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 ASUS AI Life features ................................................... 1-6 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features .............................................. 1-6 1.3.4 Digital Home features ................................................... 1-9 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ........................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes .................................................................... 2-2 2.2.3 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ......................................................... 2-3 2.2.4 Motherboard layout ......................................................... 2-4 2.2.5 Layout contents ............................................................... 2-5 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................... 2-7 2.3.1 Installing the CPU ........................................................... 2-8 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan .............................. 2-10 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan ......................... 2-12 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-14 2.4.1 Overview ....................................................................... 2-14 2.4.2 Memory conîÂÂgurations .................................................. 2-14 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM .......................................................... 2-21 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ........................................................ 2-21 2.5 Expansion slots .......................................................................... 2-22 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card ......................................... 2-22 2.5.2 ConîÂÂguring an expansion card ..................................... 2-22 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments ................................................... 2-23 2.5.4 PCI slots ........................................................................ 2-24 2.5.5 PCI Express x1 slot ....................................................... 2-24 2.5.6 T wo PCI Express x16 slots ........................................... 2-24
iv Contents 2.6 Jumpers ...................................................................................... 2-26 2.7 Connectors ................................................................................. 2-28 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .................................................. 2-28 2.7.2 Internal connectors ....................................................... 2-31 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the îÂÂrst time ........................................................ 3-1 3.2 T urning off the computer ............................................................. 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function .................................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch .............................. 3-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-1 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility ........................................................ 4-1 4.1.2 Creating a bootable îÂÂoppy disk ....................................... 4-4 4.1.3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility ................................................... 4-5 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility ................................................................ 4-6 4.1.5 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility ...................................... 4-9 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................. 4-10 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen .........................................................4-1 1 4.2.2 Menu bar ........................................................................4-1 1 4.2.3 Navigation keys ..............................................................4-1 1 4.2.4 Menu items ................................................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ............................................................ 4-12 4.2.6 ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds ....................................................... 4-12 4.2.7 Pop-up window ............................................................. 4-12 4.2.8 Scroll bar ....................................................................... 4-12 4.2.9 General help ................................................................. 4-12 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................. 4-13 4.3.1 System T ime ................................................................. 4-13 4.3.2 System Date ................................................................. 4-13 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ........................................................ 4-13 4.3.4 Language ...................................................................... 4-13 4.3.5 Primary , Third, and Fourth IDE Master/Slave ............... 4-14 4.3.6 IDE ConîÂÂguration .......................................................... 4-15 4.3.7 System Information ....................................................... 4-17
v Contents 4.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-18 4.4.1 JumperFree ConîÂÂguration ............................................ 4-18 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status ......................................................... 4-22 4.4.3 USB ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-23 4.4.4 CPU ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-24 4.4.5 Chipset .......................................................................... 4-26 4.4.6 Onboard Devices ConîÂÂguration .................................... 4-28 4.4.7 PCI PnP ........................................................................ 4-30 4.4.8 DH Feature page .......................................................... 4-31 4.5 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-32 4.5.1 Suspend Mode .............................................................. 4-32 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume ........................................ 4-32 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support .......................................................... 4-32 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support ....................................................... 4-32 4.5.5 APM ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-33 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor ......................................................... 4-35 4.6 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-38 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority ...................................................... 4-38 4.6.2 Hard Disk Drives ........................................................... 4-39 4.6.3 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration .......................................... 4-39 4.6.4 Security ......................................................................... 4-41 4.7 T ools menu ................................................................................. 4-43 4.7.1 ASUS Music Alarm ........................................................ 4-43 4.7.2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 .......................................................... 4-45 4.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-46 Chapter 5: Software support 5.1 Installing an operating system ................................................... 5-1 5.2 Support CD information .............................................................. 5-1 5.2.1 Running the support CD ................................................. 5-1 5.2.2 Drivers menu ................................................................... 5-2 5.2.3 Utilities menu .................................................................. 5-3 5.2.4 Make Disk menu ............................................................. 5-6 5.2.5 Manual menu .................................................................. 5-7 5.2.6 Contact information ......................................................... 5-7 5.2.7 Other information ............................................................ 5-8
vi Contents 5.3 Software information ................................................................. 5-10 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo 2 ........................................................... 5-10 5.3.2 AI NET2 ........................................................................ 5-12 5.3.3 Audio conîÂÂgurations ..................................................... 5-13 5.3.4 ASUS PC Probe II ......................................................... 5-20 5.3.5 ASUS Music Alarm ........................................................ 5-26 5.4 RAID conîÂÂgurations .................................................................. 5-29 5.4.1 Installing Serial A T A hard disks ..................................... 5-30 5.4.2 Intel î RAID conîÂÂgurations ............................................. 5-30 5.4.3 JMicron î RAID ConîÂÂguration ........................................ 5-40 5.4.4 Silicon Image î RAID conîÂÂguration ................................ 5-48 5.4.5 Cross-RAID ConîÂÂguration: Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) with ASUS EZ-Backup and Intel ICH7R î ... 5-61 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ....................................................... 5-64 5.5.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS .... 5-64 5.5.2 Creating a RAID driver disk in Windows î ...................... 5-64 Chapter 6: A TI î CrossFire⢠technology support 6.1 Overview ....................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 Requirements .................................................................. 6-1 6.1.2 Before you begin ............................................................. 6-1 6.2 Installing CrossFire⢠graphics cards ....................................... 6-2 6.3 Software information ................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1 Installing the device drivers ............................................. 6-5 6.3.2 Using the Catalyst⢠Control Center ............................... 6-7 Appendix: CPU features A.1 Intel î EM64T .................................................................................. A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) ........................ A-1 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading T echnology ........................................... A-3
vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturer âÂÂs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiîÂÂcations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user âÂÂs authority to operate this equipment.
viii Safety information Electrical safety ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adpater or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company . ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to îÂÂx it by yourself. Contact a qualiîÂÂed service technician or your retailer . Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately . ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠Avoid dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualiîÂÂed service technician or your retailer . This symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical and electronic equipment) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products.
ix About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and conîÂÂguring the motherboard. How this guide is organized This guide contains the following parts: ⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Descriptions of the BIOS items are also provided. ⢠Chapter 5: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ⢠Chapter 6: A TI CrossFire⢠support This chapter describes the A TI CrossFire⢠feature and shows the graphics card installation procedures. ⢠Appendix: CPU features The Appendix describes the CPU features and technologies that the motherboard supports. Where to îÂÂnd more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. Optional documentation Y our product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty îÂÂyers, that may have been added by your dealer . These documents are not part of the standard package.
x Conventions used in this guide T o make sure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. T ypography Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Key s encl osed i n the less- than a nd gre ater-t han s ign mea ns tha t you must p ress the enclo sed ke y. Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key . <Key1 Key2 Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously , the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl Alt D> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /i[î¿lename] afudos /ip5wdh.rom DANGER/W ARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: T ips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
xi P5W DH Deluxe speciî¿cations summary CPU LGA775 socket for Intel î Pentium î 4/Celeron î processor Supports Intel î Pentium î Processor Extreme Edition and Intel î Pentium î D Processor Supports Intel î next generation 65 nm and Intel Intel î Core ⢠2 Duo/Intel Intel î Core ⢠2 Extreme processors processors Supports Intel î next generation Multi-Core processor Compatible with Intel î 05B/ 05A and 04B/04A processors Intel î EM64T and Hyper-Threading T echnology ready Chipset Intelî 975X Intelî ICH7R Front Side Bus 1066 / 800 MHz Memory Dual-channel memory architecture - 4 x 240-pin DIMM sockets support ECC/non-ECC DDR2 800/667/533 MHz memory modules - Supports up to 8 GB system memory Intel î MPT (Intel î Memory Pipeline T echnology) ASUS Hyper Path3 Note: Visit the ASUS website at www.asus.com for the latest QualiîÂÂed V endors List (QVL). Expansion slots 2 x PCI Express⢠x16 slots for discrete graphics card 2 x PCI Express⢠x1 slots 3 x PCI slots CrossFire⢠Supports A TI CrossFire⢠graphics cards (both at x8 mode) ASUS T wo-slot thermal design ASUS PEG Link Advanced Thermal Design ASUS 8-Phase Power Design ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Fanless Design: Heat-pipe thermal solution Storage/RAID Intel î ICH7R Southbridge supports: - 1 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 - 3 x Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s devices with RAID 0,1, 5 conîÂÂguration - Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology Jmicron î JMB363 Serial A T A controller supports: - 1 x External Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s (SA T A-on-the-Go) - 1 x Internal Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s with RAID 0, 1 conîÂÂguration with External Serial A T A 3.0 �b/s External Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s - 1 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 connector for two devices Note: Do not remove/unplug the External SA T A device when running under RAID mode. Silicon Image î 4723 Hardware RAID controller (ASUS EZ-Backup) supports: - 2 x Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s with RAID 0 and RAID 1 conîÂÂguration (continued on the next page)
xii P5W DH Deluxe speciî¿cations summary Storage/RAID (continued) Supports RAID 10 through cross-conîÂÂguration between three (3) Serial A T A ports from Intel î ICH7R and one (1) Serial A T A port fr om Silicon Image î 4723 Hardware RAID controller LAN Marvell î 88E8053 dual Gigabit LAN controllers, both featuring AI NET2 Wireless LAN: 54 Mbps IEEE 802.1 1g (ASUS WiFi-AP Soloâ¢) High DeîÂÂnition Audio Realtek î ALC882M 8-channel CODEC Supports Multi-Streaming, Jack-Sensing and Jack-Retasking T echnology Anti-Pop Function Optical and Coaxial S/PDIF Out interfaces Features Dolby î Master Studio T echnology - Dolby ProLogic IIX - Dolby Headphone - Dolby Virtual Speaker - Dolby Digital Live IEEE 1394 TI 1394 controller supports: - 2 x IEEE 1394a connectors (1 at mid-board, 1 on the rear panel) USB Supports up to 8 USB 2.0/1.1 ports ASUS Digital Home features ASUS EZ Backup⢠- 2 x Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s support hardware RAID 0 or RAID 1 mode - Plug and play: Default setting in RAID 1 mode requires no driver and no BIOS conîÂÂguration ASUS Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠- 54 Mbps IEEE 802.1 1g, backward compatible with 1 1 Mbps IEEE 802.1b - Software Access Point mode - Station mode: Infrastructure mode and Ad-Hoc mode ASUS DH Remote⢠- Power - Quick Power - Noise off - EZ WiFi - AP Launch - Full Screen - Media Control Zone ASUS MP3-In⢠(continued on the next page)
xiii P5W DH Deluxe speciî¿cations summary (continued on the next page) ASUS AI Life features Stack Cool 2 patented fanless cooling system SA T A-On-The-Go external Serial A T A port AI Quiet ASUS Exclusive Overclocking features Intelligent overclocking tools: - AI NOS⢠(Non-delay Overclocking System) - AI Overclocking (intelligent CPU frequency tuner) - ASUS PEG Link (automatic performance tuning for single/dual graphics cards) Precision T weaker: - vDIMM: 12-step DRAM voltage control - vCore: Adjustable CPU voltage at 0.0125 V increment - Stepless Frequency Selection(SFS) allows FSB tuning from 200 MHz up to 400 MHz at 1 MHz increment - PCI Express x16 frequency tuning from 90 MHz to 150 MHz at 1 MHz increment Adjustable FSB/DDR ratio Fixed PCI/PCI Express frequencies Overclocking protection: - ASUS C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) ASUS AI Booster Utility Other ASUS special features ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 ASUS Q-Fan2 ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS MyLogo 2 Rear panel 1 x PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 1 x PS/2 mouse port (green) 1 x Serial port 1 x IEEE 1394a port 1 x External Serial A T A port 1 x Optical S/PDIF Out port 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 2 x LAN (RJ-45) ports 4 x USB 2.0/1.1 ports 1 x WiFi-AP Solo⢠antenna jack 8-channel audio ports
xiv P5W DH Deluxe speciî¿cations summary Internal connectors 2 x USB 2.0 connectors support four additional USB 2.0 ports 2 x IDE connectors 1 x Floppy disk drive connector 6 x Serial A T A connectors 1 x IEEE1394a connector 1 x CPU / 2 x Chassis / 2 x Power fan connectors 1 x Azalia Digital Header (ADH) Front panel High DeîÂÂnition Audio connector Chassis intrusion connector CD audio-in connector MP3 audio-in connector S/PDIF Out connector 24-pin A TX power connector 4-pin A TX12 V power connector System panel connector ASUS EZ Backup RAID selection mode jumper BIOS features 8 Mb Flash ROM,AMI BIOS, PnP , DMI2.0, WfM2.0, SM BIOS 2.3, PXE & RPL Manageability WOL by PME,WOR by PME, Chassis Intrusion Power requirements A TX power supply (with 24-pin and 4-pin 12 V plugs) A TX 12 V 2.0 compliant Support CD contents Device Drivers Make RAID driver disk for Intel î ICH7R and JMicron î JMB 363 RAID Manuals for Intel Intel î ICH7R, ASUS EZ-Backup, JMicron î JMB 363, and Cross-RAID (RAID 10) ASUS PC Probe 2 ASUS LiveUpdate Utility ASUS DH Remote application ASUS WiFi-AP Solo⢠Wizard Anti-virus utility (OEM version) Intervideo î WinDVD î software Form factor A TX form factor: 12 in x 9.6 in (30.5 cm x 24.5 cm) *SpeciîÂÂcations are subject to change without notice.
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features ............................................................................ 1-2
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 1-1 1.1 Welcome! Th ank yo u f or b uyi ng an A SUS î P5W DH Deluxe motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below . 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer . ASUS Digital Home Accessories ⢠ASUS DH Remote ⢠ASUS DH Remote receiver ⢠ASUS WiFi-AP Solo⢠antenna ⢠ASUS EZ Backup SA T A cables 2 ⢠2-in-1 SA T A power cable ⢠ASUS MP3-In Module Accessories ⢠1 x ASUS Q-Connector set (USB, IEEE 1394a, system panel) - for retail version only ⢠1 x IEEE 1394a port module ⢠2 x SA T A cables ⢠3 x SA T A power cables for six devices ⢠1 x Ultra DMA 133/100/66 cable ⢠1 x IDE cable ⢠1 x FDD cable ⢠1 x 2-port USB 2.0 module ⢠1 x Optional fan ⢠I/O shield Documentation ⢠User guide
1-2 Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 Product highlights Latest processor technology This motherboard supports the latest Intel î Pentium î 4 processors in the LGA775 package. With 1066/ 800 MHz FSB, Hyper-Threading T echnology support, and core-speeds of up to 3.8 �Hz and beyond, Intel î âÂÂs L�A775 Pentium î 4 is among the fastest desktop processors to date. See page 2-7 for details. Intel î Coreâ¢2 Duo/ Intel î Coreâ¢2 Extreme CPU support This motherboard supports the latest powerful and energy efîÂÂcient processors from Intel î . Intel î Coreâ¢2 Duo and Intel î Coreâ¢2 Extreme are based on the Intel î Core⢠Microarchitecture and built on the 65-nanometer (nm) process technology the 65-nanometer (nm) process technology with copper interconnect. Intel Intel î Coreâ¢2 Duo and Intel î Coreâ¢2 Extreme allow users to step up to new levels of gaming experience and multi-tasking performance. Boosting performance is a shared and multi-core optimized L2 cache of 2 MB or 4 MB, guaranteeing enhanced user experience in the digital home and ofîÂÂce. See page 2-7 for details. Intel î 65 nm Dual-Core T echnology CPU support Dual-core processors contain two physical CPU cores with dedicated L2 caches to meet demands for more powerful processing. Intel î âÂÂs 65 nm process is the most advanced chip manufacturing technology , delivering breakthrough performance, enhanced media experience, and low power consumption. Intel î 65nm dual-core processors utilize the latest package technologies for a thinner , lighter design without compromising performance. See page 2-7 for details. Intel î 975X/ICH7R chipset The Intel î 975X Memory Controller Hub (MCH) and the ICH7R I/O controller hub provide the vital interfaces for the motherboard. The Intel î 975X supports up to 8 �B dual-channel DDR2-667/533 MHz, 1066/800 FSB, PCI Express x16 graphics, and dual-core CPU. The MCH supports the Intel î Memory Pipeline T echnology (MPT) that boosts system performance. The Intel î ICH7R Southbridge integrates four Serial A T A ports enabled through the Serial A T A 3 Gb/s RAID controller to ensure data security and enable powerful multi-task processing.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 1-3 A TI Radeon î Xpress 200 CrossFire⢠The A TI Radeon î Xpress 200 CrossFire⢠boosts image quality and rendering speed, eliminating the need to crank down screen resolutions to get high quality images. The chipset allows higher antialiasing, anisotropic îÂÂltering, shading, and texture settings. A TI Radeon î Xpress 200 CrossFire⢠features the A TI Catalyst⢠Control Center that allows you to get real-time 3D-rendered previews of adjustments to your display conîÂÂgurations and advanced 3D settings. See Chapter 6 for details. Intel î Memory Pipeline T echnology (MPT) The Intel î MPT increases system-level and standard operating performance by optimizing memory access between CPU and system memory . Intel î EM64T The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 CPUs with the Intel î EM64T (Extended Memory 64 T echnology). The Intel î EM64T feature allows your computer to run on 64-bit operating systems and access larger amounts of system memory for faster and more efîÂÂcient computing. See the Appendix for details. Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) The Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) intelligently manages the CPU resources by automatically adjusting the CPU voltage and core frequency depending on the CPU loading and system speed or power requirement. See page 4-25 and the Appendix for details. PCI Express⢠interface Th e m oth erb oa rd fu lly s up por ts PCI E xp res s, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI speciîÂÂcations. See page 2-24 for details.
1-4 Chapter 1: Product introduction 8-channel high deîÂÂnition audio Onboard is the Realtek î ALC882M High DeîÂÂnition Audio 8-channel audio CODEC. This CODEC is fully-compliant with Intel î High DeîÂÂnition Audio standard (192 KHz, 24-bit audio). With the CODEC, 8-channel audio ports, and S/PDIF interfaces, you can connect your computer to home theater decoders to produce crystal-clear digital audio. The Realtek î ALC882M CODEC comes with a software application that features jack detection to monitor the plugging status of each jack, impedance sensing to determine audio device classes, and pre-deîÂÂned equalization for various audio devices. See pages 2-28, 2-29, and 5-13 for details. Theater-level audio (designed for Dolby î Master Studio) This motherboard offers theater-level 7.1 surround sound and audio speciîÂÂcations higher than that of DVD. Enjoy true home theatre experience with the following advanced sound technologies: Dolby î Prologic IIx, Dolby î Headphone, Dolby î Virtual Speaker , and Dolby î Digital Live. See page 5-18 for details. IEEE 1394a support The motherboard supports the IEEE 1394a interface that provides high-speed and îÂÂexible PC connectivity to a wide range of peripherals and devices compliant to IEEE 1394a standards. The IEEE 1394a interface allows up to 400 Mbps transfer rates through simple , low-cost, high-bandwidth asynchronous (real-time) data interfacing between computers, peripherals, and consumer electronic devices such as camcorders, VCRs, printers, TVs, and digital cameras. See pages 2-28 and 2-37 for details. S/PDIF digital sound ready The mothe rboard suppo rts t he S/PDIF technology through the S/PDIF interfaces on the rear panel. The S/PDIF technology turns your computer into a high-end entertainment system with digital connectivity to powerful audio and speaker systems. See page 2-30 for details. USB 2.0 technology The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 speciîÂÂcation, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See pages 2-29 and 2-37 for details.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 1-5 Multi-RAID solution Onboard RAID controllers provide the motherboard with multiple RAID functionality that allows you to select the best RAID solution using Serial A T A devices. ⢠ASUS EZ-Backup. Enabled by Silicon ImageâÂÂs SiI4723 controller , ASUS EZ-Backup provides ready-to-go hardware RAID for plug-and play RAID 1 and easy-to-conîÂÂgure RAID 0 sets of two hard disk drives ⢠Intel î ICH7R Southbridge RAID provides RAID level 5 support for three or more hard disk drives. ⢠Cross-RAID allows you to build a RAID 10 set through a cross-conîÂÂguration of ASUS EZ-Backup and Intel î ICH7R. ⢠JMicron î RAID. Enabled by JMicron î JMB363 controller , JMicron î RAID extends the advantages of software RAID beyond internal hard disk drives to an external disk or external, port-multiplier enabled enclosure. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to conîÂÂgure RAID. Dual Gigabit LAN solution The motherboard comes with dual Gigabit LAN controllers to provide the total solution for your networking needs. These network controllers use the PCI Express segment to provide faster data bandwidth for your wired or wireless Internet, LAN, and îÂÂle sharing requirements. See page 2-28 for details.
1-6 Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3.2 ASUS AI Life features Serial A T A I/II technology and SA T A-On-The-Go Th e m oth erb oa rd fu lly s up por ts the Serial A T A II 3.0 Gb/s technology through the Serial A T A interfaces and the Intel î ICH7R MCH. The Serial A T A 3 Gb/s speciîÂÂcation provides twice the bandwidth of the current Serial A T A products with a host of new features, including Nativa Command Queueing (NCQ), and Power Management (PM) Implementation Algorithm. Serial A T A allows for thinner , more îÂÂexible cables with lower pin count and reduced voltage required. Leveraging these Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s features is the SA T A-On-The-Go. Supported by the Jmicron î JMB363 Serial A T A controller are two Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s connectors (one at mid-board and one on the rear panel) provide smart setup, and hot-plug function. See pages 2-29 and 2-34 for details. AI Quiet The ASUS AI Quiet function dynamically controls CPU speed and reduces temperature and fan speeds, thus minimizing noise and ensuring quiet operation. See page 4-35 for details. ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 is a fan-less and zero-noise cooling solution that lowers the temperature of critical heat generating components by 20úC. The motherboard uses a special design on the printed circuit board (PCB) to dissipate heat that critical components generate. See page 2-3 for details. 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System⢠(NOS) is a technology that auto-detects the CPU loading and dynamically overclocks the CPU speed only when needed. See page 4-21 for details.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 1-7 AI NET2 AI NET2 is a BIOS-based diagnostic tool that detects and reports Ethernet cable faults and shorts. With this utility , you can easily monitor the condition of the Ethernet cable connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port. During the bootup process, AI NET2 immediately diagnoses the LAN cable and reports shorts and faults up to 100 meters at 1 meter accuracy . See pages 4-22 and 5-12 for details. 8-Phase Power Design The ASUS 8-Phase Power Design prolongs CPU lifespan and keeps the system stable by preventing high power stress to the CPU and power supply module. The design ensures high efîÂÂciency operation to generate less heat compared with conventional power solutions, thus achieving cool system environment and making this motherboard ideal for overclocking. Fanless Design and Heat-pipe The ASUS fanless design allows multi-directional heat îÂÂow from major thermal sources in the motherboard to lower overall system temperature, resulting in quieter operation and longer system life. ASUS has devoted special efforts to address the thermal issues across the motherboard, and most notably in the following areas: CPU, power , VGA, Northbridge and Southbridge. The heat pipe, heatsink, and strategic board layout were tailor made to dissipate heat in the most efîÂÂcient manner . ASUS exclusive two-slot thermal design ASUS two-slot thermal design provides better air-îÂÂow and lower V�A cards temperature than other bransâ one-slot design, which also ensures better system stability and longer component life cycle. Precision T weaker This feature allows you to îÂÂne-tune the CPU/memory voltage and gradually increase the Front Side Bus (FSB) and PCI Express frequency to achieve maximum system performance. PEG Link Mode This feature enhances your PCI Express graphics card performance by allowing the motherboard to automatically adjust the PCI Express graphics link mode to the correct frequency based on the system conîÂÂguration. Four additional settings are available for overclocking the PEG Link Mode. See page 4-27 for details.
1-8 Chapter 1: Product introduction ASUS Hyper Path 3 This feature signiîÂÂcantly shortens latency time during data transfers, allowing users to experience the real power of their computers. See page 4-27 for details. CrashFree BIOS 3 Th e A SUS Cr as hF ree BI OS 3 al low s u se rs to re st or e c orr upt ed B IOS da ta fr om a US B î ash di sk c ont ain in g the BI OS îÂÂl e. Th is ut il ity sa ves u se rs the co st an d h ass le of bu yin g a re pl ac eme nt BI OS ch ip.S ee pa ge 4-9 for details. ASUS EZ Flash 2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 is a user-friendly BIOS update utility . Simply press the predeîÂÂned hotkey to launch the utility and update the BIOS without entering the OS. Update your BIOS easily without preparing a bootable diskette or using an OS-based îÂÂash utility . See page 4-5 for details. ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology The ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efîÂÂcient operation. See page 4- 36 for details. ASUS Multi-language BIOS The multi-language BIOS allows you to select the language of your choice from the available options. The localized BIOS menus allow easier and faster conîÂÂguration. See page 4-13 for details. ASUS MyLogo 2 ASUS My Logo 2 is the new feature present in the motherboard that allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable and animated boot logos. See pages 4-40 and 5-10 for details. ASUS Music Alarm W ake up to the music of your choice instead of the irritating sound of an alarm clock. The ASUS Music Alarm gives you a personal wake-up call with your favorite CD music without having to enter the OS. See page 4-43 and 5-26 for details. ASUS Q-Connector Y ou can use ASUS Q-Connector to connect/disconnect chassis front panel cables by only a few easy steps. See pages 2-43 for details.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 1-9 1.3.4 Digital Home features ASUS WiFi-AP Solo⢠WiFi AP Solo⢠allows a new level of versitility for your PC, enabling it to create a complete wireless home network in either AP or wirelesss client mode. Users will be able to play LAN games, connecting to the Internet, access and share printers, and use Skype from anywhere within range. WiFi-AP Solo⢠can provide these functions even when the PC is in sleep mode, so users can use Skype as a true replacement for tradition long distance telephone service. WiFi-AP Solo⢠is an on-board feature, which means that users will save the extra WiFi-AP cost. (Refer to the ASUS Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠user guide for details.) ASUS DH Remote⢠DH Remote⢠is a convenient PC remote controller that gives users unprecedented control over their PCs from the comfort of their couches. With the touch of a button, users can instantly operate the following functions: (Refer to the (Refer to the ASUS DH Remote⢠user guide for details.) Power: T urns the computer on/off. Quick Power: Puts the computer quickly into sleep mode. Noise Off: Reduces the noise coming from the computer . EZ WiFi: Puts the computer quickly into sleep mode but allowing WiFi-AP Solo⢠to still operate. Full Screen: Puts the media application into full screen. AP Launch: Launches the media application. Media Control Zone: Controls the media application. ASUS MP3-In⢠A convenient interface between computers and MP3 players, the ASUS MP3-In⢠features enables MP3 players to connect to PC speakers even when the PC power is off, which means that users can enjoy the sound quality from PC speakers without additional stereo equipment cost. (Refer to the ASUS MP3-In⢠quick (Refer to the ASUS MP3-In⢠quick installation guide for details.)
1-10 Chapter 1: Product introduction ASUS EZ Backup⢠ASUS EZ Backup requires no driver or BIOS conîÂÂguration. ASUS EZ Backup offers plug and play RAID to backup your data instantaneously . Exclusive to ASUS and the îÂÂrst of its kind in the world, EZ Backup allows users to utilize SA T A2 technology to build RAID 1 (default) or RAID 0 without requiring any BIOS setup or any other conîÂÂguration. ASUS EZ Backup is ideal for anyone who wants to secure data on the hard drive but does not want the hassle of complicated software conîÂÂguration. See section âÂÂ5.4.4 Silicon Image î RAID conîÂÂgurationâ for details.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................... 2-7 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-14 2.5 Expansion slots .......................................................................... 2-22 2.6 Jumpers ...................................................................................... 2-26 2.7 Connectors ................................................................................. 2-28
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-1 Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2.1 Before you proceed T ake note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity . ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the A TX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply . Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Onboard LED SB_PWR ON Standby Power OFF Powered Off
2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information P5W DH DELUXE î 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the conîÂÂguration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard îÂÂts into it. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. 2.2.1 Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below . 2.2.2 Screw holes Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Place this side towards the rear of the chassis
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-3 2.2.3 ASUS Stack Cool 2 The motherboard comes with the ASUS Stack Cool 2 cooling solution that lowers the temperature of critical heat generating components by 20úC. The motherboard uses a special design on the printed circuit board (PCB) to dissipate heat that critical components generate.
2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.4 Motherboard layout P ANEL P5W DH DELUXE î AAFP CHASSIS 24.5cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in) CPU_FAN DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) CHA_FAN2 FLOPPY Super I/O 8Mb BIOS TSB43AB22A CD PCIEX1_1 PCIEX16_2 CLRTC SA TA_RAID1 Intel î ICH7R SB_PWR EA TXPWR PRI_IDE CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power Intel î MCH 975X PCI1 USB56 LAN2_USB12 PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: K eyboard LAN1_USB34 AUDIO PCIEX1_2 PCIEX16_1 PCI2 PC I3 MP3IN ALC 882M 88E8053 88E8053 PWR_FAN1 PWR_FAN2 JMicron JMB363 SPDIF_OUT USB78_WFG USB9 LGA775 ESA TA_1394 A TX12V GL850A Silicon Image Sil4723 RAID_SEL SA T A4 CHA_FAN1 IE1394_1 USB78 SPDIF_O1 SPDIF_O2 COM1 EZ_RAID2 EZ_RAID1 SA T A1 PRI_EIDE SA T A3 ADH
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-5 2.2.5 Layout contents Slots Page 1. DDR2 DIMM slots 2-14 2. PCI slots 2-24 3. PCI Express x1 slot 2-24 4. PCI Express x16 slots 2-24 Jumpers Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLRTC) 2-26 2. ASUS EZ-Backup RAID mode selection (RAID_SEL) 2-27 Rear panel connectors Page 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-28 2. Serial port 2-28 3. IEEE 1394a port 2-28 4. LAN1 (RJ-45) port 2-28 5. LAN2 (RJ-45) port 2-28 6. Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange) 2-28 7. Rear Speaker Out port (black) 2-28 8. Line In port (light blue) 2-29 9. Line Out port (lime) 2-29 10. Microphone port (pink) 2-29 1 1. Side Speaker Out port (gray) 2-29 12. USB 2.0 ports 1,2, 3, and 4 2-29 13. External SA T A port 2-29 14. Optical S/PDIF Out port 2-30 15. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 2-30 16. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-30 17. Antenna jack 2-30 18. ASUS Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠LED indicator 2-30
2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information Internal connectors Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) 2-31 2. JMicron î IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [black]) 2-31 3. Intel î ICH7R IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) 2-32 4. Intel î ICH7R Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1 [red], SA T A3 [black], SA T A4 [black],) 2-33 5. JMicron î JMB363 Serial A T A connector (7-pin SA T A_RAID1 [red]) 2-34 6. ASUS EZ-Backup Serial A T A connectors (7-pin EZ_RAID1 [orange], EZ_RAID2 [orange]) 2-35 7. MP3-In connector (4-pin MP3IN) 2-35 8. Internal audio connector (4-pin CD) 2-36 9. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 2-36 10. USB connector (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) 2-37 1 1. IEEE 1394a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1 [Red]) 2-37 12. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) 2-38 13. CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 3-pin PWR_F AN1, 3-pin PWR_F AN2, 3-pin CHA_F AN1, 3-pin CHA_F AN2) 2-38 14. ATX po wer co nne cto rs (24-pin EA TXPWR, 4-pin A TX12V) 2-40 15. System panel connector (20-pin P ANEL) ⢠System power LED (2-pin PLED) ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) ⢠System warning speaker (4-pin SPEAKER) ⢠A TX power button/soft-off button (2-pin PWRSW) ⢠Reset button (2-pin RESET) 2-42
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-7 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î 4/Celeron î/ Intel î Pentium î D and the Intel î next generation 65 nm Intel Intel î Coreâ¢2 Duo and Intel Intel î Coreâ¢2 Extreme multi-core processor in the processor in the 775-land package. This motherboard also supports the Intel î Pentium î Processor Extreme Edition, the latest CPU with embedded dual physical cores and Hyper-Threading technology , making four CPU threads possible. Refer to the table below for the operating system support status. ⢠If installing a dual-core CPU, connect the chassis fan cable to the PWR_F AN1/2 or CHA_F AN1/2 connector to ensure system stability . ⢠Install a chassis fan with at least a speed of 2400 rpm and 8 CFM turnrate when using a dual-core CPU to ensure system stability . Overheating can permanently damage the system and/or CPU. ⢠Install an additional chassis fan to ensure better air îÂÂow when overclocking. ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the PnP cap is on the socket and the socket contacts are not bent. Contact your retailer immediately if the PnP cap is missing, or if you see any damage to the PnP cap/socket contacts/motherboard components. ASUS will shoulder the cost of repair only if the damage is shipment/transit-related. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA775 socket. ⢠The product warranty does not cover damage to the socket contacts resulting from incorrect CPU installation/removal, or misplacement/loss/ incorrect removal of the PnP cap. OS licensing support list Intel î Dual-Core CPU support Intel î Dual-Core CPU and Hyper-Threading T echnology support Windows î 2000 Professional Windows î 2000 Advanced Server Windows î 2000 Advanced Server Windows î XP Home Windows î XP Home Windows î XP Professional Windows î XP Professional Windows î Server 2003 - Standard, Enterprise Windows î Server 2003 - Standard, Enterprise
2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135ú angle. 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. Retention tab Load lever This side of the socket box should face you. PnP cap A B T o prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU. 2.3.1 Installing the CPU T o install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. Before installing the CPU, make sure that the cam box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE CPU Socket 775
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-9 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket then îÂÂt the socket alignment key into the CPU notch. Alignment key Gold triangle mark 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. 7. If installing a dual-core CPU, connect the chassis fan cable to the PWR_F AN1/2 or CHA_F AN1/2 connector to ensure system stability . A B The CPU îÂÂts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with the Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 T echnology (EM64T), Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST), and Hyper-Threading T echnology . Refer to the Appendix for more information on these CPU features. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreîÂÂnger to a 100ú angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). Load plate A B CPU notch
2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information Fastener Motherboard hole 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan The Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. T o install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four fasteners match the holes on the motherboard. ⢠When you buy a boxed Intel î Pentium î 4 processor , the package includes the CPU fan and heatsink assembly . If you buy a CPU separately , make sure that you use only Intel î -certiîÂÂed multi-directional heatsink and fan. ⢠Y our Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 heatsink and fan assembly comes in a push-pin design and requires no tool to install. ⢠If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly , make sure that you have properly applied Thermal Interface Material to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly . Make sure that you have installed the motherboard to the chassis before you install the CPU fan and heatsink assembly . Make sure to orient each fastener with the narrow end of the groove pointing outward. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) Orient the heatsink and fan assembly such that the CPU fan cable is closest to the CPU fan connector . Narrow end of the groove
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-11 3. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_F AN. 2. Push down two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to secure the heatsink and fan assembly in place. B B A A A A B B Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector . P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE CPU fan connector CPU_F AN GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM
2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan T o uninstall the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Disconnect the CPU fan cable from the connector on the motherboard. 2. Rotate each fastener counterclockwise. 3. Pull up two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to disengage the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard. B B A A A A B B 4. Carefully remove the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-13 5. Rotate each fastener clockwise to ensure correct orientation when reinstalling. The narrow end of the groove should point outward after resetting. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) Narrow end of the groove Refer to the documentation in the boxed or stand-alone CPU fan package for detailed information on CPU fan installation.
2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. DDR2 DIMMs are notched differently to prevent installation on a DDR DIMM socket. The îÂÂgure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: Channel Sockets Channel A DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 Channel B DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 2.4.2 Memory conîÂÂgurations Y ou may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, and 2 GB unbuffered ECC/non-ECC DDR2 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠For dual-channel conîÂÂguration, the total size of memory module(s) installed per channel must be the same (DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2 = DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2). ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency . For optimum compatibility , it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) for the latest QualiîÂÂed V endors List. ⢠For dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration, install the DIMMs in slots DIMM_B1 and DIMM_A1 (orange slots); install another pair of DIMMs in slots DIMM_B2 and DIMM_A2 (black slots). P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE 240-pin DDR2 DIMM sockets DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-15 Notes on memory limitations ⢠Due to chipset limitation, this motherboard can only support up to 8 GB on the operating systems listed below . Y ou may install a maximum of 2 GB DIMMs on each slot. ⢠Some old-version DDR2-667 DIMMs may not match Intel î âÂÂs On-Die-T ermination (ODT) requirement and will automatically downgrade to run at DDR2-533. If this happens, contact your memory vendor to check the ODT value. ⢠Due to chipset limitation, DDR2-667 with CL=4 will be downgraded to run at DDR2-533 by default setting. If you want to operate with lower latency , adjust the memory timing manually . ⢠Due to chipset limitation, DDR2-533 with CL=3 will be downgraded to run at DDR2-400 by default setting. If you want to operate with lower latency , adjust the memory timing manually . Important notice on installing Windows î XP 32-bit version If you install Windows î XP 32-bit version Operating System (OS), the limitation of this OS version is that it may reserve a certain amount of memory space for system devices. We recommend that you install less than 3 GB system memory if you would like to work under Windows î XP 32-bit version OS. The excess memory installation will not cause any usage problem, but it will not give users the beneîÂÂt of manipulating this excess memory space. Visit the ASUS F AQ site for further explanation: http://support.asus.com/faq/faq. aspx?SLanguage=en-us Under General Search, make the selections as shown, then click Search. Click the article titled â 4GB memory installed but less memory size detected. â Y ou also may check the URLs below for third party comments on this issue: http://dlsvr01.asus.com/pub/ASUS/mb/4GB_Rev1.pdf http:/ /www.i ntel.co m/supp ort/mot herboa rds/se rver /sb/cs -016594 .htm 32-bit 64-bit Windows î 2000 Advanced Server Windows î Server 2003 Enterprise Edition Windows î Server 2003 Standard x64 Edition Windows î XP Professional x64 Enterprise Edition Windows î Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition
2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information QualiîÂÂed V endors Lists DDR2-800 Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2-800 with lower latency QualiîÂÂed V endors List. Size V endor Chip No. Chip brand Side(s) Part No. CL DIMM socket support (Optional) A* B* C* 512 MB KINGSTON Heat-Sink Package â SS KHX6400D2/512 â â¢ ⢠512 MB KINGSTON K4T51083QC â SS KVR800D2N5/512 â 1024 MB KINGSTON K4T51083QC â DS KVR800D2N5/1G â â¢ ⢠256 MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE7 â SS M378T3253FZ3-CE7 â â¢ ⢠256 MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE7(ECC) â SS M391T3253FZ3-CE7 â 512 MB SAMSUNG EDD339XX â SS M378T6553CZ3-CE7 â â¢ ⢠512 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T256800AF25 â DS HYS64T64520HU-2.5-A â â¢ ⢠⢠512 MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-S6 â SS HYMP564U64AP8-S6 â 1024 MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-S6 â DS HYMP512U64AP8-S6 â 512 MB MICRON 5JAIIZ9DQQ â SS MT8HTF6464A Y-80EA3 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB MICRON 5JAIIZ9DQQ â DS MT16HTF12864A Y-80EA3 â â¢ ⢠⢠512 MB CORSAIR Heat-Sink Package â SS CM2X512A-6400 â 1024 MB CORSAIR Heat-Sink Package â DS CM2X1024-6400PRO â â¢ ⢠⢠256 MB A-DA TA E2508AB-GE-E â SS M20EL6F3G3170A1D0Z â â¢ ⢠256 MB A-DA TA E2508AB-GE-E â SS M20EL6F3G3160A1D0Z â 256 MB A-DA TA E2508AB-GE-E â SS M2OEL6F3G3160A1D0Z â â¢ 512 MB A-DA TA E2508AB-GE-E â DS M2OEL6F3H4170A1D0Z â 256 MB Apacer E2508AB-GE-E â SS 78.81091.420 â â¢ ⢠512 MB Apacer E2508AB-GE-E â DS 78.91091.420 â 512 MB Crucial Heat-Sink Package â SS BL6464AA804.8FA â 1024 MB Crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL12864AA804.16F A â â¢ 256 MB T winMOS E2508AB-GE-E â SS 8G-24IK2-EBT â 512 MB OCZ Heat-Sink Package â SS OCZ28001024EBDCPE-K â 512 MB Elixir N2TU51280AE-25C â SS M2Y51264TU88A2B-25C â 512 MB NANY A NT5TU64M8AE-25C â SS NT512T64U88A1BY -25C â 512 MB NANY A NT5TU64M8BE-25C â SS NT512T64U88B0BY -25C â 1024 MB NANYA NT5TU64M8BE-25C â DS NT1GT64U8HB0BY -25C â Side(s): SS - Single-sided DS - Double-sided DIMM support: A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory conîÂÂguration. B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either the orange slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration. C - Supports two pairs of modules inserted into both the orange and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-17 Size V endor Chip No. Chip brand Side(s) Part No. CL DIMM socket support (Optional) A* B* C* 512MB KINGSTON E5108AE-6E-E â SS Kâ¢R667D2N5/512 â â¢ ⢠1024MB KINGSTON E5108AE-6E-E â DS Kâ¢R667D2N5/1G â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB KINGSTON E5108AE-6E-E â SS Kâ¢R667D2E5/512 â â¢ ⢠⢠256MB KINGSTON HYB18T256800AF3 â SS Kâ¢R667D2N5/256 â â¢ ⢠⢠256MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE6 â SS M378T3253FZ0-CE6 â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE6 â DS M378T6453FZ0-CE6 â â¢ ⢠⢠256MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE6(ECC) â SS M391T3253FZ0-CE6 â â¢ ⢠512MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE6(ECC) â DS M391T6453FZ0-CE6 â â¢ 256MB SAMSUNG K4T51 163QC-ZCE6 â SS M378T3354CZ0-CE6 â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG ZCE6K4T51083QC â SS M378T6553CZ0-CE6 â â¢ 1024MB SAMSUNG ZCE6K4T51083QC â DS M378T2953CZ0-CE6 â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB MICRON 4â¢B41D9CZM â DS MT16HTF6464A Y -667B4 â â¢ ⢠256MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512160AF-3S â SS HYS64T32000HU-3S-A â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3S â SS HYS64T64000HU-3S-A â â¢ ⢠1024MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3S â DS HYS64T128020HU-3S-A â â¢ ⢠⢠256MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T256800AF3S(ECC) â SS HYS72T32000HU-3S-A â â¢ ⢠512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3S(ECC) â SS HYS72T64000HU-3S-A â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3S(ECC) â DS HYS72T128020HU-3S-A â â¢ ⢠512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y5 â SS HYMP564U64AP8-Y5 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y5 â DS HYMP512U64AP8-Y5 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HY5PS1G831FP-Y5(ECC) â SS HYMP1 12U72P8-Y5 â â¢ 512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y5(ECC) â SS HYMP564U72AP8-Y5 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y5(ECC) â DS HYMP512U72AP8-Y5 â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y4 â SS HYMP564U64AP8-Y4 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y4 â DS HYMP512U64AP8-Y4 â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y4(ECC) â SS HYMP564U72AP8-Y4 â â¢ ⢠1024MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y4(ECC) â DS HYMP512U72AP8-Y4 â â¢ ⢠256MB ELPIDA E2508AB-6E-E â SS EBE25UC8ABF A-6E-E â â¢ ⢠512MB ELPIDA E5108AE-6E-E â SS EBE51UD8AEF A-6E-E â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB ELPIDA Engineering Sample â DS EBE1 1UD8AEFA-6E-E â â¢ ⢠512MB crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL6464AA664.16FB â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL12864AA664.16F A â â¢ ⢠512MB crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL6464AL664.16FB â â¢ ⢠⢠1024MB crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL12864AL664.16F A â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL6464AA663.8FA â â¢ 1024MB crucial Heat-Sink Package â DS BL12864AA663.16F A â â¢ ⢠⢠512MB Kingmax E5108AE-6E-E â SS KLCC28F-A8EB5 â â¢ ⢠1024MB Kingmax E5108AE-6E-E â DS KLCD48F-A8EB5 â â¢ ⢠512MB Apacer E5108AE-6E-E â SS 78.91092.420 â â¢ 1024MB Apacer E5108AE-6E-E â DS 78.01092.420 â 512MB A-DAT A E5108AE-6E-E â SS M20EL5G3H3160B1C0Z â â¢ 512MB TwinMOS E5108AE-GE-E â SS 8G-25JK5-EBT â 512MB GEIL Heat-Sink Package â SS GX21GB5300UDC â DDR2-667 (continued on the next page)
2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information Size Vendor Chip No. Chip brand Side(s) Part No. CL DIMM socket support (Optional) A* B* C* 512MB GEIL Heat-Sink Package â SS GX21GB5300DC â 256MB NANY A NT5TU32M16AG-3C â SS NT256T64UH4A0FY-3C â 512MB NANY A NT5TU64M8AE-3C â SS NT512T64U88A0BY -3C â 512MB NANY A NT5TU64M8BE-3B â SS NT512T64U88B0BY -3C â 1024MB NANY A NT5TU64M8BE-3B â DS NT1GT64U8HB0BY -3C â 512MB Elixir N2TU51280AF-3C â SS M2U51264TU88A0F-3C â 1024MB Elixir N2TU51280AF-3C â DS M2U1G64TU8HA2F-3C â 512MB OCZ Heat-Sink Package â SS OCZ26671024EBDCPE-K â 1024MB OCZ Heat-Sink Package â DS OCZ26672048EBDCPE-K â 1024MB PQI E5108AE-5C-E â DS MEAD-403LA â 512MB WINTEC 4UAI2D9CRZ â SS 39127282 â 1024MB WINTEC 4W AIID9CWX â DS 39137282 â 512MB MDT 18D51280D-30518 â SS M512-667-8 â 1024MB MDT 18D51280D-30528 â DS M924-667-16 â 512MB Kingbox DD2640800-667 â SS â â 1024MB Kingbox DD2640800-667 â DS â â Side(s): SS - Single-sided DS - Double-sided DIMM support: A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory conîÂÂguration. B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either the orange slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration. C - Supports two pairs of modules inserted into both the orange and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration. Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2-667 with lower latency QualiîÂÂed V endors List. DDR2-667
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-19 (continued on the next page) Size V endor Chip No. Chip brand Side(s) Part No. CL DIMM socket support (Optional) A* B* C* 256 MB KINGSTON E51 16AF-5C-E â SS KVR533D2N4/256 â 512 MB KINGSTON HYB18T512800AF37 â SS KVR533D2N4/512 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB KINGSTON 5YDIID9GCT â DS KVR533D2N4/1G â â¢ ⢠⢠512 MB SAMSUNG K4T51083QB-GCD5 â SS M378T6553BG0-CD5 â â¢ 256 MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-GCD5 â SS M378T3253FG0-CD5 â â¢ ⢠512 MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-GCD5 â DS M378T6453FG0-CD5 â 512 MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-GCD5(ECC) â DS M391T6453FG0-CD5 â â¢ 1024 MB SAMSUNG K4T51083QB-GCD5(ECC) â DS M391T2953BG0-CD5 â â¢ 256 MB MICRON 4DBIIZ9BQT â SS N/A â â¢ ⢠512 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3(ECC) â SS HYS72T64000HU-3.7-A â 512 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AC37 â SS HYS64T64000GU-3.7-A â â¢ ⢠⢠256 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512160AF-3.7 â SS HYS64T32000HU-3.7-A â â¢ ⢠⢠512 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF37 â SS HYS64T64000HU-3.7-A â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF37 â DS HYS64T128020HU-3.7-A â â¢ ⢠⢠2048 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T1G800AF-3.7 â DS HYS64T256020HU-3.7-A â 256 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T5121608BF-3.7 â SS HYS64T32000HU-3.7-B â â¢ ⢠512 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800BF37 â SS HYS64T64000HU-3.7-B â â¢ ⢠1024 MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800BF37 â DS HYS64T128020HU-3.7-B â 512 MB Hynix HY5PS12821F-C4 â SS HYMP564U648-C4 â â¢ ⢠512 MB Hynix HY5PS12821F-C4(ECC) â SS HYMP564U728-C4 â 1024 MB Hynix HY5PS12821F-C4 â DS HYMP512U648-C4 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix HY5PS12821F-C4(ECC) â DS HYMP512U728-C4 â â¢ ⢠1024 MB Hynix HY5PS12821F-E3(ECC) â DS HYMP512U728-C4 â 512 MB Hynix HY5PS12821FP-C4(ECC) â SS HYMP564U728-C4 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix HY5PS12821FP-C4 â DS HYMP512U648-C4 â 512 MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-C3 â SS HYMP564U64AP8-C3 â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-C3 â DS HYMP512U64AP8-C3 â â¢ 512 MB ELPIDA E5108AB-5C-E(ECC) â SS EBE51ED8ABFA-5C-E â â¢ ⢠⢠512 MB ELPIDA E5108AB-5C-E â SS EBE51UD8ABF A-5C â â¢ ⢠512 MB ELPIDA E5108AB-5C-E â SS EBE51UD8ABF A-5C-E â â¢ ⢠⢠1024 MB ELPIDA E5108AB-5C-E â DS EBE1 1UD8ABFA-5C-E â 2048 MB ELPIDA E1 108AA-5C-E â DS EBE21EE8AAFA-5C-E â 256 MB CORSAIR MIII0051832M8CEC â SS VS256MB533D2 â 512 MB CORSAIR MI1 10052432M8CEC â DS VS512MB533D2 â 256 MB Apacer E51 16AB-5C-E â SS 78.81077.420 â â¢ ⢠⢠256 MB KINGMAX E5116AB-5C-E â SS KLBB68F-36EP4 â â¢ ⢠512 MB KINGMAX E5108AE-5C-E â SS KLBC28F-A8EB4 â â¢ 1024 MB KINGMAX E5108AE-5C-E â DS KLBD48F-A8EB4 â â¢ ⢠512 MB KINGMAX KKEA88E4AAK-37 â SS KLBC28F-A8KE4 â â¢ ⢠1024 MB KINGMAX 5MB22D9DCN â DS KLBD48F-A8ME4 â â¢ 512 MB Transcend K4T51083QB-GCD5 â SS TS64MLQ64V5J â â¢ 1024 MB Transcend K4T51083QB-GCD5 â DS TS128MLQ64V5J â â¢ ⢠256 MB CENTURY K4T56083QF-GCD5 â SS 25V6S8SSD5F4-K43 â 512 MB CENTURY E5108AB-5C-E â SS 25V2H8EL5CB4-J43 â 1024 MB CENTURY E5108AB-5C-E â DS 25V0H8EL5CB4-J45 â 1024 MB CENTURY E5108AB-5C-E â DS 25VOH8EL5C â 256 MB elixir N2TU51216AF-37B â SS M2U25664TUH4A0F-37B â 512 MB elixir N2TU51280AF-37B â SS M2U51264TU88A0F-37B â 256 MB Aeneon AET960UD00-37C88X â SS AET560UD00-370A98X â DDR2-533
2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information Size V endor Chip No. Model Side(s) Part No. CL DIMM socket support (Optional) A* B* C* 512 MB Aeneon AET960UD00-37C88X â SS AET660UD00-370A98X â 512 MB Aeneon AET93F370AG0513 â SS AET660UD00-370A98X â 256 MB Aeneon AET94F370A â SS AET560UD00-370A98Z â 256 MB Aeneon AET94F370A â SS AET560UD00-370A98X â 512 MB Aeneon AET93F370A â SS AET660UD00-370A98Z â 512 MB Aeneon AET93F370A â SS AET660UD00-370A98X â 512 MB Aeneon AET93F370 â SS AET660UD00-370A98X â 1024 MB Aeneon AET93F370A â DS AET760UD00-370A98X â 256 MB NANY A NT5TU32M16AF-37B â SS NT256T64UH4A0F-37B â 512 MB NANY A NT5TU64M8AF-37B â SS NT512T64U88A0F-37B â 512 MB NANY A NT5TU64M8AF-37B(ECC) â SS NT512T72U89A0F-37B â 1024 MB NANY A NT5TU64M8AF-37B â DS NT1GT64U8HA0F-37B â 1024 MB PQI 64MX8D2-E â DS MEAB-323LA â 512 MB PQI 64MX8D2-E â SS MEAB-423LA â 512 MB T winMOS K4T51083QB-GCD5 â SS 8D-22JB5-K2T â 256 MB SimpleT ech 858S032F25A â SS SVM-42DR2/256 â 512 MB SimpleT ech 858S064F25A â SS SVM-42DR2/512 â 1024 MB Patriot Heat-Sink Package â SS PDC21G5600 XBLK â 512 MB MDT 18D51280D-3.70S20 â SS M512-533-8 â 1024 MB MDT 18D51280D-3.70448 â DS M924-533-16 â DDR2-533 Side(s): SS - Single-sided DS - Double-sided DIMM support: A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory conîÂÂguration. B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either the orange slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration. C - Supports two pairs of modules inserted into both the orange and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory conîÂÂguration. Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2-533 with lower latency QualiîÂÂed V endors List.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-21 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. T o install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM T o remove a DIMM: 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it îÂÂts in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. Do not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Support the DIMM lightly with your îÂÂngers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it îÂÂips out with extra force. Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 3 2 DDR2 DIMM notch 1 1
2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card T o install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press îÂÂrmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier . 6. Replace the system cover . 2.5.2 ConîÂÂguring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, conîÂÂgure the it by adjusting the software settings. 1. T urn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any . See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âÂÂShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conîÂÂicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. Refer to the table on the next page for details.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-23 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. IRQ assignments for this motherboard A B C D E F G H PCI slot 1 â â â â shared â â PCI slot 2 â â â â â â shared â PCI slot 3 â â â â â â â shared Onboard IDE (JMicron î ) â shared â â â â â â Onboard 1394 â â â â â shared â â Onboard LAN1 â â â shared â â â â Onboard LAN2 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x16 1 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x16 2 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x1 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x1 â â shared â â â â â USB controller 1 â â â â shared â â â USB controller 2 â shared â â â â â â USB controller 3 â â shared â â â â â USB controller 4 â â â shared â â â â USB 2.0 controller â â â â shared â â â Serial A T A â â â â â â â shared IDE â â â â â â shared â HD Audio â â â shared â â â â IRQ Priority Standard function 0 1 System T imer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Redirect to IRQ#9 3 1 1 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 4 12 Communications Port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7 15 Printer Port (LPT1)* 8 6 System CMOS/Real T ime Clock 9 4 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 10 5 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 1 1 6 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 12 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port* 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel
2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.4 PCI slots The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI speciîÂÂcations. The îÂÂgure shows a LAN card installed on a PCI slot. 2.5.5 PCI Express x1 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x1 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Express speciîÂÂcations. The following îÂÂgure shows a network card installed on the PCI Express x1 slot. 2.5.6 T wo PCI Express x16 slots This motherboard supports two A TI CrossFire⢠PCI Express x16 graphics cards that comply with the PCI Express speciîÂÂcations. The îÂÂgure shows two graphics cards installed on the PCI Express x16 slots. See Chapter 6 for details on the CrossFire⢠technology feature.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-25 ⢠We recommend that you install a graphics card on the primary (orange) PCI Express slot and install other PCI Express devices on the black PCI PCI Express x16 slot. . ⢠In CrossFire⢠mode, each PCI Express x16 slot works at x8 bandwidth. ⢠In CrossFire⢠mode, install the A TI CrossFire⢠Edition (Master) graphics card on the primary (orange) PCI Express slot. ⢠Refer to the table below for possible PCI Express Card conîÂÂgurations. * Install two A TI graphics cards from the same GPU family that support CrossFire⢠mode. ** The speed of the primary PCIe x16 slot (PCIEX16_1) changes to x8 mode after you install any device in the secondary PCIe x16 (PCIEX16_2) slot. PCI Express x16 slot conîÂÂgurations PCIEX16_1 (orange) slot PCIEX16_2 (black) slot Card type Speed Card type Speed Non-CrossFire⢠mode PCIe x16 graphics card x16 NA NA PCIe x16 graphics card x8 Other PCIe x16 graphics card x8** (dual screen) PCIe x16 graphics card x8 Other PCIe card x8, x4, x1** Dual graphics cards in CrossFire⢠mode* A TI î CrossFire⢠Edition graphics card x8 A TI graphics card x8
2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.6 Jumpers 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. T o erase the RTC RAM: 1. T urn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery . 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Reinstall the battery . 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. Y ou do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLR TC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Clear RTC RAM CLRTC Normal Clear RTC (Default) 1 2 2 3
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-27 2. ASUS EZ-Backup RAID mode selection (RAID_SEL) This jumper allows you to select the ASUS EZ-Backup RAID mode. Keeping the default setting RAID 1 allows you to build a RAID 1 set without any jumper or BIOS setting. Install the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager utility from the support CD and install two Serial A T A hard disk drives on the EZ_RAID1 and EZ_RAID2 connectors on the motherboard, and you are ready to mirror your data. For detailed information about ASUS EZ-Backup, see section âÂÂ5.4.4 Silicon Image î RAID conîÂÂguration.â P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE RAID Setting RA ID _S EL RAID1 (Default) 1 BIG mode 1 [Fast mode] 1 RAID0 [Safe mode]
2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.7 Connectors 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors 1. PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. Serial port. This 9-pin COM1 port is for pointing devices or other serial devices. 3. IEEE 1394a port. The 6-pin IEEE 1394a port provides high-speed connectivity for audio/video devices, storage peripherals, PCs, or portable devices. 4. LAN1 (RJ-45) port. This Marvell î LAN port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 5. LAN2 (RJ-45) port. This Marvell î LAN port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. LAN port Activity/Link Speed LED Status Description Status Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection ORANGE Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection LAN port LED indications SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED 6. Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). This port connects the center/ subwoofer speakers. 7. Rear Speaker Out port (black). This port connects the rear speakers in a 4/8-channel audio conîÂÂguration, and the side speakers in a 6-channel conîÂÂguration. 1 16 4 2 3 5 6 12 10 18 1 1 13 14 15 8 9 7 17
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-29 Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel conîÂÂguration Refer to the audio conîÂÂguration table below for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel conîÂÂguration. Port Headset 2-channel 4-channel 6-channel 8-channel Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Gray â â â Side Speaker Out Black â Rear Speaker Out Side Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Orange â â Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer 8. Line In port (light blue). This port connects a tape, CD, DVD player , or other audio sources. 9. Line Out port (lime). This port connects a headphone or a speaker . In 4-channel, 6-channel, and 8-channel conîÂÂguration, the function of this port becomes Front Speaker Out. 10. Microphone port (pink). This port connects a microphone. 1 1. Side Speaker Out port (gray). This port connects the side speakers in an 8-channel audio conîÂÂguration. 12. USB 2.0 ports 1, 2, 3 and 4. These 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 support S5 wake-up by USB. For the location of these ports, see page 2-4. 13. External SA T A port. This port connects to an external SA T A box or a Serial A T A port multiplier . The external SA T A port supports external Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s devices. Longer cables support higher power requirements to deliver signal up to two meters away , and enables improved hot-swap function.
2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information The following items are only for the optional Wireless LAN module. 17. ASUS Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠LED indicator . The ASUS Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠comes with a green data transmission LED (AIR). For more information, refer to the ASUS Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠user guide. 18. Antenna jack. This jack is on the onboard wireless LAN module that allows you to set up a wireless network and exchange information with other wireless devices without tangling cables and wires. Connect the moveable omni-directional antenna to this jack. 14. Optical S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device This port connects an external audio output device via an optical S/PDIF cable. . 15. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via a coaxial S/PDIF cable. 16. PS/2 keyboard port (purple). This port is for a PS/2 keyboard.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-31 This connector does not support A T API devices. 2. JMicron î IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [black]) This connector is for Ultra A T A 133/100/66 signal cables. The JMicron î IDE connector supports up to two IDE hard disk drives for easier data storage. 2.7.2 Internal connectors 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) This connector is for the provided îÂÂoppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector , then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the îÂÂoppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Floppy disk drive connector NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN 1 FLOPPY P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_EIDE P IN 1
2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Intel î ICH7R IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) The onboard IDE connector is for the Ultra DMA (133/)100/66 signal cable. There are three connectors on each Ultra DMA 133/100/66 signal cable: blue, black, and gray . Connect the blue connector to the motherboardâÂÂs IDE connector , then select one of the following modes to conîÂÂgure your device. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector . This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. ⢠Install devices on this connector (PRI_IDE) îÂÂrst, then install on the JMicron î IDE connector , PRI_EIDE (see item #2 on the previous page for the location of the PRI_EIDE connector . If any device jumper is set as âÂÂCable-Select,â make sure all other device jumpers have the same setting. Drive jumper setting Mode of device(s) Cable connector Single device Cable-Select or Master - Black T wo devices Cable-Select Master Black Slave Gray Master Master Black or gray Slave Slave P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-33 ⢠These connectors are set to Standard IDE mode by default. In Standard IDE mode, you can connect Serial A T A boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial A T A RAID set using these connectors, set the ConîÂÂgure SA T A As item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.3.6 IDE ConîÂÂgurationâ for details. ⢠For RAID 5, use at least three hard disk drives. ⢠For RAID 10 (cross-RAID conîÂÂguration), use three hard disk drives on these connectors, and one hard disk drive on EZ_RAID1. See section âÂÂ5.4.5 Cross-RAID conîÂÂgurationâ for details. ⢠Use two Serial A T A hard disk drives for each RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. Important notes on Serial A T A ⢠Y ou must install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack 1 before using Serial A T A hard disk drives. The Serial A T A RAID feature (RAID 0/RAID 1/RAID 5/RAID 10) is available only if you are using Windows î 2000/XP/Server 2003 or later version. ⢠Wh en usin g t he con nec to rs in Standard IDE mode, connect the primary (boot) hard disk drive to the SA T A1 connector . 4. Intel î ICH7R Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1 [red], SA T A3 [black], SA T A4 [black], ) These connectors are for the Serial A T A signal cables for Serial A T A hard disk drives. If you installed Serial A T A hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 5 conîÂÂguration with the Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology through the onboard Intel î ICH7R RAID controller . Y ou may create a RAID 10 set through a cross-RAID conîÂÂguration with the onboard Intel î ICH7R RAID controller and ASUS EZ-Backup. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up Serial A T A RAID conîÂÂgurations. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE SA T A connectors SA T A1 GN D RS AT A_ TXP3 RS AT A_ TXN3 GN D RS AT A_ RXP3 RS AT A_ RXN3 GN D GN D RS AT A_ TXP1 RS AT A_ TXN1 GN D RS AT A_ RXP1 RS AT A_ RXN1 GN D SA T A3 GN D RS AT A_ TXP4 RS AT A_ TXN4 GN D RS AT A_ RXP4 RS AT A_ RXN4 GN D SA T A4
2-34 Chapter 2: Hardware information 5. JMicron î JMB363 Serial A T A connector (7-pin SA T A_RAID1 [black]) This connector is for a Serial A T A signal cable for a Serial A T A hard disk drive that you can combine with an external Serial A T A 3.0 �b/s device to conîÂÂgure a RAID 0, and RAID 1 set through the onboard Jmicron î JMB363 SA T A RAID controller . Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up Serial A T A RAID conîÂÂgurations. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE SA T A RAID connector SA T A_RAID1 GN D RS AT A_ TXP2 RS AT A_ TXN2 GN D RS AT A_ RXP2 RS AT A_ RXN2 GN D ⢠T o build RAID 1, we recommend that you install the hard disk drives on the ASUS EZ-Backup connectors (EZ_RAID1 and EZ_RAID2) to enjoy the instant setup; otherwise, you may also install on the ICH7R connectors. ⢠Y ou may install an extra hard disk drive on.the JMicron Serial A T A connector after using up the Intel î ICH7R and ASUS EZ-Backup connectors The JMicron î JMB363 Controller item in the BIOS is set to [Basic] by default, allowing you to enable the hot-plug function for the external device. Set to [Raid] to use the connector to build a RAID set. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Device ConîÂÂgurationâ for details. Connector Color Setting Use SA T A1 Red Master Boot disk SA T A 3/SA T A4 Black Slave Data disk Serial A T A hard disk drive connection
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-35 6. ASUS EZ-Backup Serial A T A connectors (7-pin EZ_RAID1 [orange], EZ_RAID2 [orange]) These connectors are for the ASUS EZ-Backup feature. Connect Serial A T A signal cables that support Serial A T A hard disk drives to build a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set easily . Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to build an EZ-Backup RAID set. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE EZ_RAID connectors EZ_RAID1 GN D RS AT A_ TXP2 RS AT A_ TXN2 GN D RS AT A_ RXP2 RS AT A_ RXN2 GN D GN D RS AT A_ TXP1 RS AT A_ TXN1 GN D RS AT A_ RXP1 RS AT A_ RXN1 GN D EZ_RAID2 Y ou may create a RAID 10 set through a cross-RAID conîÂÂguration by installing three hard disk drives on the ICH7R Serial A T A connectors, and one hard disk drive on EZ_RAID1. See section âÂÂ5.4.5 Cross-RAID conîÂÂguration for details. 7. MP3-In connector (4-pin MP3IN [red]) [red]) ) This connector is for the MP3-In module that allows you to connect your MP3 player to the speakers of the computer . For more information, refer to the MP3-In Module Quick Installation Guide or the ASUS FrontLinker⢠user guide. ⢠The MP3-In module is bundled with the motherboard package if the motherboard does not include the ASUS FrontLinkerâ¢. Connect the cable to the MP3IN connector , and enjoy music from computer speakers even when the PC is turned off. ⢠Do not plug the MP3-In cable into the Audio-In connector . P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE MP3-In connector MP3IN Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground
2-36 Chapter 2: Hardware information 9. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Th is con nec to r is for a c has sis -mo un te d f ron t pa nel au dio I /O mo dul e t ha t su ppo rts ei th er HD Au di o or leg acy A Câ 97 aud io s tan dar d. ⢠We recommend that you connect a high-deîÂÂnition front panel audio module to this connector to avail the motherboard high-deîÂÂnition audio capability . ⢠By default, this connector is set to HD Audio. If you want to connect a legacy AC `97 front panel audio module to this connector , set the Front Panel Support T ype item in the BIOS Setup to [AC97]. See page 4-28 for details. 8. Internal audio connector (4-pin CD) This connector allows you to receive stereo audio input from a CD-ROM. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Internal audio connector CD Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Analog front panel connector AAFP Legacy AC 97 audio pin definition SENSE2_RETUR PORT1 L PORT2 R PORT2 L SENSE1_RETUR SENSE_SEND PORT1 R PRESENCE# GND NC MIC2_L Line out_R Line out_L NC NC MIC2_R NC AGND HD Audio-compliant pin definition
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-37 10. USB connector (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with the USB 2.0 speciîÂÂcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Never connect a 1394 cable to the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE USB 2.0 connectors USB56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1 1 1. I EEE 13 94a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1 [Red]) This connector is for an additional IEEE 1394a port. Connect the IEEE 1394a module cable (red) to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. Never connect a USB port module cable to the IEEE 1394 connector . Doing so will damage the motherboard! P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE IEEE 1394a connector IE1394_1 1 GND 12V TPB1- GND TP A1- 12V TPB1 GND TP A1 Only USB34 on the rear panel can support S5 wake-up by keyboard/mouse function.
2-38 Chapter 2: Hardware information 12. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector . The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pins labeled âÂÂChassis Signalâ and âÂÂGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. 13. CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 3-pin PWR_F AN1, 3-pin PWR_F AN2, 3-pin CHA_F AN1, 3-pin CHA_F AN2) The fan c onnect ors su pport cooli ng fan s of 2A (24W max.) at 12V . Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Fan connectors CPU_F AN CHA_F AN1 PWR_F AN2 GND Rotation 12V CPU_F AN CHA_F AN2 PWR_F AN2 CHA_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM GND Rotation 12V PWR_F AN1 PWR_F AN1 CHA_F AN2 GND Rotation 12V For the rear chassis For the side chassis For the front chassis P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE Chassis intrusion connector CHASSIS 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default)
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-39 Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. InsufîÂÂcient air îÂÂow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! If you install two VGA cards, we recommend that you plug the rear chassis fan cable to the motherboard connector labeled PWR_F AN1 or PWR_F AN2 for better thermal environment. Suggestions for installing the chassis fan: ⢠If you install a fan at the back of the chassis, plug the fan cable to PWR_F AN2 or PWR_F AN1. ⢠If you install a fan on the side of the chassis, plug the fan cable to CHA_F AN1. ⢠If you install a fan in front of the chassis, plug the fan cable to CHA_F AN2.
2-40 Chapter 2: Hardware information 14. ATX po wer con ne ct ors (24-pin EA TXPWR, 4-pin A TX12V) These connectors are for A TX power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to îÂÂt these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down îÂÂrmly until the connectors completely îÂÂt. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE A TX power connectors EA TXPWR A TX12V 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground 12V DC GND 12V DC GND Important notes on motherboard power requirements ⢠For a fully conîÂÂgured system, we recommend that you use a power supply unit (PSU) that complies with A TX 12 V SpeciîÂÂcation 2.0 (or later version) and provides a minimum power of 400 W . ⢠Do not forget to connect the 4-pin EA TX12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠T o support an Intel î Dual-Core CPU up to 965 Extreme Edition, make sure that the PSU can provide at least DC 16A (peak 22A) on the 12V_2 lead. The vendors list on the next page is provided for your reference
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-41 Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when conîÂÂguring a system with more power consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. Refer to the Power wattage tables below and on the next page for details. V endor Model Max. Power (W) FSP 400-60THN 400 Seasonic SS-600HT 600 Seasonic SS-400FT 400 Acbel A TX-550CA-AB8FM 550 THERMAL T AKE HPC-420-302 DF 400 AUSU S-30EP 300 Bestec A TX0400D5W 400 Silverstone SST ST56ZF 560 Enermax Eg701AX-VE 600 Power Supply Unit reference vendors list Loading Heavy Normal Light CPU Extreme Edition 965 Prescott 672 Conroe E6700 DDR2 800 1G*4 1G*2 512M*2 VGA A TI 1900XTX*2 NVIDIA 6800GTX*1 NVIDIA 6600*1 HDD IDE*2 IDE*1 IDE*1 SA T A*5 SA T A*3 SA T A*2 CD-ROM 2 2 1 USB 7 6 4 PCI-E 1 1 1 PCI 2 2 1 Wi-Fi AP Solo⢠Enabled Enabled Enabled DH Remote Enabled Enabled Enabled Required 12V current 12V -V2 12V -V1 12V -V2 12V -V1 12V -V2 12V -V1 >12A >18A >12A >8A >12A >6A Required wattage >=525W >=300W >=160W Power wattage
2-42 Chapter 2: Hardware information 15. System panel connector (20-pin P ANEL) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. ⢠System power LED (2-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector . The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector . The IDE LED lights up or îÂÂashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker . The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠A TX power button/soft-off button (2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF . ⢠Reset button (2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power . P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE System panel connector * Requires an A TX power supply . P ANEL PLED- PWR 5V Speaker Ground RESET Ground Reset Ground Ground PWRSW PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE_LED PLED SPEAKER
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 2-43 ASUS Q-Connector (system panel) Y ou can use the ASUS Q-Connector to connect/disconnect chassis front panel cables in a few steps. Refer to the instructions below to install the ASUS Q- Connector . 1. Connect the front panel cables to the ASUS Q-Connector . Refer to the labels on the Q-Connector to know the detailed pin deîÂÂnitions, then match them to the respective front panel cable labels. 2. Install the ASUS Q-Connector to the system panel connector , making sure the orientation matches the labels on the motherboard. 3. The front panel functions are now enabled. The îÂÂgure shows the Q-Connector properly installed on the motherboard.
2-44 Chapter 2: Hardware information Installing the optional fan 1. Position the fan above the pipe and heatsink assembly . 2. Fit the grooved edge to the heatsink. 3. Carefully push down the fan until it snugly îÂÂts the heatsink, then connect the fan cables. ⢠Plug the optional fan cables to the NB_F AN and/or PWR_F AN connector on the motherboard. ⢠Make sure the optional fan is installed correctly to prevent damage to the fan and motherboard components. Do not tilt the fan. Do not install the fan with its rear side facing you. Install the optional fan only if you are using a passive cooler or a water cooler . Installing the optional fan with an active CPU cooler will interfere with the airîÂÂow and destabilize the system.
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the îÂÂrst time ........................................................ 3-1 3.2 T urning off the computer ............................................................. 3-2
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 3-1 3.1 Starting up for the î¿rst time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover . 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector . 5. T urn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power , the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems withA TX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the A TX power button. If your monitor complies with âÂÂgreenâ standards or if it has a âÂÂpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST . While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power , the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. AMI BIOS beep codes 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4. Beep Description Error One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh T ime error No master drive detected T wo continuous beeps followed by two short beeps Floppy controller failure T wo continuous beeps followed by four short beeps Hardware component failure
3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 Turning off the computer 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function If you are using Windows î 2000: 1. Click the Start button then click Shut Down... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK button to shut down the computer . 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. If you are using Windows î XP or later version: 1. Click the Start button then select T urn Off Computer . 2. Click the T urn Off button to shut down the computer . 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section âÂÂ4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details.
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary 4 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................. 4-10 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................. 4-13 4.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-18 4.5 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-32 4.6 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-38 4.7 T ools menu ................................................................................. 4-43 4.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-46
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) 2. ASUS EZ Flash 2 (Updates the BIOS in DOS using a îÂÂoppy disk/USB îÂÂash disk, or the motherboard support CD.) 3. ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk.) 4. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk/ USB îÂÂash disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS îÂÂle fails or gets corrupted.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS îÂÂle to a bootable îÂÂoppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities. Installing ASUS Update T o install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click ASUS Update. See page 5-3 for the Utilities screen menu. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS îÂÂle ⢠Download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS îÂÂle ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP).
4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafîÂÂc, or click Auto Select. Click Next. Updating the BIOS through the Internet T o update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. Quit all Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility .
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-3 Updating the BIOS through a BIOS îÂÂle T o update the BIOS through a BIOS îÂÂle: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a îÂÂle option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail of all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS îÂÂle from the Open window , then click Save. 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.2 Creating a bootable îÂÂoppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable îÂÂoppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB îÂÂoppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB îÂÂoppy disk to the îÂÂoppy disk drive. b. Click Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My Computer. c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File from the menu, then select Format. A Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk window appears. e. Windows î XP users: Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options îÂÂeld, then click Start . Windows î 2000 environment T o create a set of boot disks for Windows î 2000: a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB îÂÂoppy disk into the drive. b. Insert the Windows î 2000 CD to the optical drive. c. Click Start, then select Run. d. In the Open îÂÂeld, type D:\bootdisk\makeboot a: assuming that D is your optical drive letter . e. Press <Enter>, then follow screen instructions to continue. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS îÂÂle to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-5 T o update the BIOS using EZ Flash 2: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for the motherboard. 2. Save the BIOS îÂÂle to a îÂÂoppy disk or a USB îÂÂash disk, then restart the system. 4.1.3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility The ASUS EZ Flash 2 feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a îÂÂoppy disk and using a DOS-based utility . The EZ Flash 2 utility is built-in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self T ests (POST). (2) Enter BIOS setup program. Go to the T ools menu to select EZ Flash2 and press <Enter> to enable it. Y ou can switch between drives by pressing <T ab> before the correct îÂÂle is found. Then press <Enter> 3. Y ou can launch the EZ Flash 2 by two methods. (1) Insert the îÂÂoppy disk/USB îÂÂash disk that contains the BIOS îÂÂle to the îÂÂoppy disk drive or the USB port. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility B312 FLASH TYPE: Winbond W39V080A 8Mb LPC BOARD: P5W-DH Deluxe VER: 0014 [0100] DATE: 05/19/2006 Current ROM Update ROM BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown PATH: C:\ A: C: Note [Enter] Select [S] Save [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move WIN98SE <DIR> NETTERM <DIR> DRIVERS <DIR> RECYCLED <DIR> WUTEMP <DIR> NEWFOL~1 <DIR> INSTALL <DIR> TEST_REB <DIR> MSDOWNLD.TMP <DIR> ⢠This functio n can supp ort de vices such as USB îÂÂash dis k, ha rd dis k, or îÂÂoppy disk with F A T 32/16/12 format only . ⢠Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! 4. When the correct BIOS îÂÂle is found, EZ Flash 2 performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done.
4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS setup The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS îÂÂle. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS îÂÂle to the îÂÂoppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. Reading îÂÂash ..... done Write to î¿le...... ok A:\> 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS îÂÂle in DOS environment using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk with the updated BIOS îÂÂle. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS îÂÂle that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS T o copy the current BIOS îÂÂle using the AFUDOS utility: Main îÂÂle name Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk you created earlier . 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[î¿lename] where the [îÂÂlename] is any user-assigned îÂÂlename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main îÂÂlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom ⢠Make sure that the îÂÂoppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1.2 MB free space to save the îÂÂle. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only . The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-7 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk you created earlier . 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[î¿lename] where [îÂÂlename] is the latest or the original BIOS îÂÂle on the bootable îÂÂoppy disk. Updating the BIOS îÂÂle T o update the BIOS îÂÂle using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) and download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for the motherboard. Save the BIOS îÂÂle to a bootable îÂÂoppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5WDH.rom Write the BIOS îÂÂlename on a piece of paper . Y ou need to type the exact BIOS îÂÂlename at the DOS prompt. A:\>afudos /iP5WDH.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îÂÂash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îÂÂash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îÂÂash ...... done Writing îÂÂash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility veriîÂÂes the îÂÂle and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5WDH.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îÂÂash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îÂÂash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îÂÂash ...... done Writing îÂÂash ...... done Verifying îÂÂash .... done Please restart your computer A:\>
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-9 4.1.5 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS îÂÂle when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Y ou can update a corrupted BIOS îÂÂle using the motherboard support CD, the îÂÂoppy disk, or the USB îÂÂash disk that contains the updated BIOS îÂÂle. Recovering the BIOS from the support CD T o recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. T urn on the system. 2. Insert the motherboard support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the CD for the BIOS îÂÂle. BIOS ROM checksum error Detecting IDE ATAPI device... Prepare the motherboard support CD, the îÂÂoppy disk or the USB îÂÂash disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility . 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. ⢠Only the USB îÂÂash disk with F A T 32/16/12 format and single partition can support ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3. The device size should be smaller than 8GB. ⢠Flash time takes around one (1) minute. ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! When found, the utility reads the BIOS îÂÂle and starts îÂÂashing the corrupted BIOS îÂÂle. Recovering the BIOS from a îÂÂoppy/USB îÂÂash disk T o recover the BIOS from a îÂÂoppy/USB îÂÂash disk: 1. Download the latest BIOS from the ASUS website (www .asus.com). Rename the BIOS îÂÂle as P5WDH.ROM . 2. Insert the îÂÂoppy/USB îÂÂash disk that contains BIOS îÂÂle to the FDD/USB port. 3. T urn on the system. 4. The utility will automatically checks the devices for the BIOS îÂÂle When found, the utility reads the BIOS îÂÂle and starts îÂÂashing the corrupted BIOS îÂÂle. 5. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process.
4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable îÂÂrmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section âÂÂ4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconîÂÂguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun Setup.â This section explains how to conîÂÂgure your system using this utility . Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conîÂÂguration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconîÂÂgure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM or the îÂÂrmware hub. The îÂÂrmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility . When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST , restart the system by pressing <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. Y ou can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the îÂÂrst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section âÂÂ4.8 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for this motherboard.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-11 System Time [06:22:54] System Date [Fri 05/04/2006] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master [ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave [ASUS CD-S520/A] Third IDE Master [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave [Not Detected] IDE Conî¿guration System Information 4.2.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conîÂÂguration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) conîÂÂguration Boot For changing the system boot conîÂÂguration Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings T o select an item on the menu bar , press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another . Navigation keys General help Menu bar Sub-menu items ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds Menu items Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system.
4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciîÂÂc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power , Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. T o display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6 ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds These îÂÂelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- conîÂÂgurable, you can change the value of the îÂÂeld opposite the item. Y ou cannot select an item that is not user-conîÂÂgurable. A conîÂÂgurable îÂÂeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a îÂÂeld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ4.2.7 Pop-up window .â 4.2.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conîÂÂguration options for that item. 4.2.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not îÂÂt on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. Main menu items Scroll bar Pop-up window System Time [06:22:54] System Date [Fri 05/04/2006] Legac y Disket te A [1 . 44 M, 3 . 5 in] Language [English] Pr ima ry IDE M as ter [S T32 041 3A] Pr ima ry IDE S la ve [A SUS CD -S5 20 /A ] Th ird ID E M as te r [No t D ete cte d] Th ird ID E S la ve [No t D et ec ted ] Fo urt h I DE Ma st er [N ot Det ect ed ] Fo urt h I DE Sl av e [No t D ete cte d] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-13 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of îÂÂoppy drive installed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] 4.3.4 Language [English] Allows you to choose the BIOS language version from the options. ConîÂÂguration options: [English] [Français] [Deutsch] [Japanese] [Chinese (GB)] [Chinese BIG5] Refer to section âÂÂ4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. System Time [06:22:54] System Date [Fri 05/04/2006] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master [ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave [ASUS CD-S520/A] Third IDE Master [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave [Not Detected] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system.
4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.5 Primary , Third, and Fourth IDE Master/Slave The BIOS automatically detects the connected IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item, then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-conîÂÂgurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. T ype [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are speciîÂÂcally conîÂÂguring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. ConîÂÂguration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector T ransfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Primary IDE Master Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST320413A Size : 20.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : 4 Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-15 PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] DMA Mode [Auto] Selects the DMA mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data T ransfer [Enabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ConîÂÂgure SA T A As [Standard IDE] Sets the conîÂÂguration for the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial A T A features that increases storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. If you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10, or the Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology conîÂÂguration from the Serial A T A hard disk drives, set this item to [RAID]. If you want to use the Serial A T A hard disk drives as Parallel A T A physical storage devices, keep the defaul setting [Standard IDE]. If yo u w ant t he Se ria l AT A h ard di sk d riv es to u se the Ad va nc ed Hos t C on tro lle r In ter fac e ( AH CI ), set t hi s i tem to [ AH CI] . IDE Conî¿guration Conî¿gure SATA As [Standard IDE] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] When in AHCI/ RAID mode SATA controller is forced to Native mode. 4.3.6 IDE ConîÂÂguration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conîÂÂgurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you want to conîÂÂgure the item.
4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Fo r d eta ils o n AHC I, go t o: www .intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012304.htm www .intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012305.htm The SA T A controller is set to Native mode when this item is set to [RAID] or [AHCI] The Onboard IDE Operate Mode and sub-menu items appear only when the ConîÂÂgure SA T A As item is set to [Standard IDE]. Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the installed operating system (OS). Set to [Enhanced Mode] if you are using native OS including Windows î 2000/XP or later version. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Compatible Mode] [Enhanced Mode] If you are using a Serial A T A optical drive, set this item to [Compatible Mode] before creating a boot disk using the support CD. Enhanced Mode Support On [S-A T A] Allows you to use native OS on Serial A T A and Parallel A T A ports. It is recommend that you do not change the default setting for better OS compatibility . In this setting, you may use legacy OS on the Parallel A T A ports only if you do not install any Serial A T A device. The P-A T A S-A T A and P-A T A options are for advanced users only . If you set to any of these options and encountered problems, revert to the default setting S-A T A. ConîÂÂguration options: [S-A T A P-A T A] [S-A T A only] [P-A T A only] Combined Mode Option [Primary P-A T A S-A T A] Allows you to select the IDE ports to use. ConîÂÂguration options: [Primary P-A T A S-A T A] [S-A T A only] [P-A T A only] The S-A T A and P-A T A options are for advanced users only . If you set to any of these options and encounter problems, revert to the default setting [Primary P-A T A S-A T A]. ConîÂÂguration options: [Primary P-A T A S-A T A] [S-A T A] [P-A T A] The Combined Mode Option item appears only when the Onboard IDE Operate Mode item is set to [Compatible Mode]. Onboard Serial-A T A BOOTROM [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard Serial A T A boot ROM. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Onboard Serial-A T A BOOTROM appears only when the ConîÂÂgure SA T A As item is set to [RAID].
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-17 4.3.7 System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciîÂÂcations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. AMI BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU speciîÂÂcation. System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory . AMIBIOS Version : 0124 Build Date : 05/25/06 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.80GHz Speed : 3800 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Size : 512MB Appropriated : 0MB Available : 512MB IDE Detect Time Out [35] Selects the time out value for detecting A T A/A T API devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] The ALPE and ASP and its sub-menu item appear only when the ConîÂÂgure SA T A As item is set to [AHCI]. ALPE and ASP [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Agressive Link Power Management (ALPE) and Aggressive Slumber/Partial (ASP) management features. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. JumperFree Conî¿guration LAN Cable Status USB Conî¿guration CPU Conî¿guration Chipset Onboard Devices Conî¿guration PCIPnP DH Feature page 4.4.1 JumperFree ConîÂÂguration AI Overclocking [Auto] Allows you to select the overclocking options to achieve the desired CPU internal frequency . Select either one of the preset overclocking conîÂÂgiuration options. Manual - allows you to individually set overclocking parameters. Auto - loads the optimal settings for the system. Overclock ProîÂÂle - loads overclocking proîÂÂles with optimal parameters for stability when overclocking. AI NOS - the ASUS AI Non-delay Overclocking System feature intelligently determines the system load and automatically boost the performance for the most demanding tasks. T ake caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Adjust system frequency/voltage. Conî¿gure System Frequency/Voltage AI Overclocking [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Select the targe CPU frequency, and the relevant parameters will be auto-adjusted. Frequencies higher than CPU manufacturer recommends are not guaranteed to be stable. If the system becomes unstable, return to the default.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-19 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization The following items appear only when you set the AI Overclocking item to [Manual]. CPU Frequency [XXX] Displays the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the CPU frequency . Y ou can also type the desired CPU frequency using the numeric keypad. The values range from 100 to 450. Refer to the table below for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. A vailable DRAM frequency options in various FSB settings * Provided for overclocking purpose only . Selecting a very high DRAM frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [DDR2-300MHz] [DDR2-400MHz] Performance Mode [Auto] Allows enhanced system performance. Setting to [T urbo] may cause the system to become unstable. If this happens, revert to the default setting [Auto]. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Standard] [T urbo] Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency FSB 1066 266 MHz FSB 800 200 MHz î FSBî ConîÂÂgurationîÂÂoptions Auto DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- 400 533 667 711* 800* 889* 1067* FSB 1066 ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠FSB 800 ⢠⢠⢠⢠â¢
4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup PCI Express Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the PCI Express frequency . This item is set to [Auto] by default. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [90] [91] ~ [150] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] A ll ow s yo u to s yn ch ro ni z e t he P CI f re qu en cy w it h t he P CI E xp re ss o r CP U fr eq ue nc y. C on îÂÂg ur at io n op ti on s: [ T o C PU ] [33.33MHz] [Auto] The following items also appear when the AI Overclocking item is set to [AI NOS]. Memory V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the DDR2 reference voltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.80V] [1.90V] [1.95V] [2.00V] [2.05V] [2.10V] [2.15V] [2.20V] [2.25V] [2.30V] [2.35V] [2.40V] Refe r to t he DDR2 docum entatio n befo re adj usti ng the memory volta ge. Set ting a very high memory voltag e may d amage the me mory modul e(s)! CPU VCore V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU VCore voltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.7000V] [1.6875V] [1.6750V] [1.6625V] [1.6500V] [1.6375V] [1.6250V] [1.6125V] [1.6000V] [1.5875V] [1.5750V] [1.5625V] [1.5500V] [1.5375V] [1.5250V] [1.5125V] [1.5000V] [1.4875V] [1.4750V] [1.4625V] [1.4500V] [1.4375V] [1.4250V] [1.4125V] [1.4000V] [1.3875V] [1.3750V] [1.3625V] [1.3500V] [1.3375V] [1.3250V] [1.3125V] [1.3000V] [1.2875V] [1.2750V] [1.2625V] [1.2500V] [1.2375V] [1.2250V] [1.2125V] [1.2000V] Refer to the CPU documentation before setting the CPU Vcore voltage. Setting a high Vcore voltage may damage the CPU! FSB T ermination V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the front side bus termination voltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.20V] [1.30V] [1.40V] [1.50V] Setting a high FSB termination voltage may damage the chipset and CPU.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-21 MCH Chipset V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the chipset voltage of the memory controller hub (MCH). ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.50V] [1.55V] [1.60V] [1.65V] Setting a high MCH chipset voltage may damage the chipset! ICH Chipset V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the chipset voltage of the I/O controller hub (ICH). ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.05V] [1.20V] Setting a high ICH chipset voltage may damage the chipset! The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking item is set to [Overclock ProîÂÂle]. Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Allows you to overclock the CPU speed through the available preset values. ConîÂÂguration options: [Overclock 5%] [ FSB888/DDR2-667] [Overclock 10%] [ FSB960/DDR2-800] [Overclock 15%] [ FSB1200/DDR2-800] [Overclock 20%] [ FSB1280/DDR2-800] [Overclock 30%] [ FSB1333/DDR2-667] [FSB1333/DDR2-834] The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking item is set to [AI NOS]. N.O.S. Mode [Auto] Sets the Non-Delay Overclocking System mode. Select either of the following conîÂÂguration options: Auto - loads the optimum sensitivity and overclocking percentage setting. Manual - allows you to manually set overclocking conîÂÂgurations. The following items appear if the NOS Mode item is set to [Manual] Sensitivity [Sensitive] Allows you to choose the sensitivity of the AI NOS sensor . Setting this item to [Sensitive] will trigger AI NOS with less CPU loading. ConîÂÂguration options: [Normal] [Sensitive] [Less-Sensitive]
4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status This menu displays the status of the Local Area Network (LAN) cable connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port. POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable LAN cable check during POST . When enabled, the menu reports the cable faults or shorts, and displays the point (length) where the fault or short is detected. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] LAN Cable Status Pair Status Length 1-2 Normal N/A 3-6 Normal N/A 4-5 Normal N/A 7-8 Normal N/A 1-2 Open 0.0M 3-6 Open 0.0M 4-5 Open 0.0M 7-8 Open 0.0M Check PCI Marvell LAN cable during POST. T arget Frequency [Overclock 3%] Allows you to set the maximum overclock percentage for the selected NOS Mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 7%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] Selecting a very high frequency may cause the system to become unstable. If this happens, revert to the default setting.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-23 4.4.3 USB ConîÂÂguration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. USB Conî¿guration Module Version - 2.24.0-10.4 USB Devices Enabled: None USB Function [8 USB Ports] Legacy USB Support [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Disabled] Enables USB host controllers. The Module V ersion and USB Devices Enabled items show the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. USB Function [8 USB Ports] Disables the USB host controllers or speciîÂÂes the . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [2 USB ports] [4 USB ports] [6 USB ports] [8 [2 USB ports] [4 USB ports] [6 USB ports] [8 USB ports] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to [Auto] allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to disable the USB 2.0 controller , or specify the number of ports to enable ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). ConîÂÂguration options: [HiSpeed ] [FullSpeed ] BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Disabled] Allows you to enable support for operating systems without an EHCI hand-off feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Ratio CMOS Setting [ 28] Sets the ratio between the CPU core clock and the Front Side Bus frequency . The BIOS auto-detects the default value of this item. Use the < > or <-> keys to adjust the values. Y ou can only adjust the Ratio CMOS if you installed an unlocked CPU. Refer to the CPU documentation for details. 4.4.4 CPU ConîÂÂguration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Conî¿gure Advanced CPU settings Manufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.80GHz Frequency : 3800 MHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 2048 KB Cache L3 : 0 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked (Max:19, Min:14) Ratio Actual Value : 19 Ratio CMOS Setting: [ 28] AI CPU Lock Free [Auto] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Execute Disable Function [Disabled] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Virtualization Technology [Enabled] Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ. The AI CPU Lock Free item appears only when you install a CPU that supports the lock free feature. Only some latest CPUs support this feature. AI CPU Lock Free [Auto] Disables or sets the AI CPU Lock Free feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the microcode updation. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Max CPUID V alue Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-25 Execute Disable Function [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the No-Execution Page Protection T echnology . Setting this item to [Enabled] forces the XD feature îÂÂag to always return to zero (0). ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Allows you to disable or set to auto the CPU Internal Thermal Control function. When set to [Auto], the BIOS automatically checks the CPUâÂÂs capability to enable TM or TM2 support. In TM mode, the CPU power consumption is reduced. In TM2 mode, the CPU core and VID are reduced. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] The following item appears only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST). Intel(R) SpeedStep T echnology [Disabled] Allows you to use the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology . When set to [Automatic], you can adjust the system power settings in the operating system to use the EIST feature. Se t t his it em t o [ Dis ab le d] if you do not want to use the EIST . ConîÂÂguration options: [Automatic] [Disabled] [Minimum] ⢠Refer to the Appendix for details on how to use the EIST feature. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EIST . The following item appears only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports Hyper Threading T echnology . Hyper Threading T echnology [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading T echnology . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.5 Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Advanced Chipset Settings Conî¿gure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] DRAM ECC Mode [Disabled] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] DRAM Throttling Threshold [Auto] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Enable or Disable Conî¿gure DRAM Timing by SPD. ConîÂÂgure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. The following sub-items appear when this item is Disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM CAS# Latency [5 Clocks] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. ConîÂÂguration options: [6 Clocks] [5 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [3 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [4 Clocks] C on tr ol s th e id le c lo ck s af te r is su in g a pr ec ha r ge c om ma nd t o th e DD R S D RA M. C on îÂÂg ur at io n op ti on s: [ 2 Cl oc ks ] ~ [6 Clocks] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [4 Clocks] Controls the laten cy bet ween t he DD R S DRAM a ctive comma nd and the rea d/writ e comm and. C onîÂÂgu rat ion op tions: [2 C loc ks] ~ [6 Clocks ] DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge Delay [15 Clocks] ConîÂÂguration options: [4 Clocks] ~ [18 Clocks] DRAM Write Recovery Time [4 Clocks] ConîÂÂguration options: [2 Clocks] ~ [6 Clocks]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-27 DRAM ECC Mode [Disabled] Allows you to disable or set the DRAM ECC mode. This item appears only when you install DRAM modules that support ECC function. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Allows you to enable, disable, or set the ASUS Hyper Path 3 feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] DRAM Throttling Threshold [Auto] Disables or sets the DRAM Thermal Throttling feature. Set to [Auto] for system stability . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. ConîÂÂguration options: [PCI Express/PCI] [PCI/PCI Express] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Sets the length of the PCI Express graphics card buffer . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Long] [Short] Link Latency [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card link latency . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] PEG Root Control [Auto] Allows you to enable, disable, or set to automatic the PCI Express graphics card root control. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] PEG Link Mode [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics link mode. Setting this item to [Auto] allows the motherboard to automatically adjust the PCI Express graphics link mode to the correct frequency based on the system conîÂÂguration. Four additional settings are available for overclocking the PE� Link Mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] [Fast] [Faster] Slot Power [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card slot power . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Light] [Normal] [Heavy] [Heavier]
4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.6 Onboard Devices ConîÂÂguration HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the high-deîÂÂnition audio CODEC. ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Front Panel Support T ype [HD A ud io ] Al low s y ou to s et the f ro nt pan el au di o c onn ec to r ( AAF P) mode to legacy ACâÂÂ97 or highâÂÂdeîÂÂnition audio depending on the audio standard that the front panel audio module supports. ConîÂÂguration options: [AC97] [HD Audio] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard IEEE 1394 controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard PCIE GbE LAN_1 [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard PCI Express Gigabit LAN 1 controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard PCIE GbE LAN_2 [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard PCI Express Gigabit LAN 2 controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] This item allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller . This item appears only when the Onboard PCIE Gbe LAN item is set to Enabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Conî¿gure Win627EHG Super IO Chipset HD Audio Controller [Enabled ] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Onboard PCIE GbE LAN_1 [Enabled] Onboard PCIE GbE LAN_2 [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] JMicron SATA/PATA Controller [Enabled] JMicron Controller Mode [Basic] JMicron SATA/RAID BOOTROM [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Enable or disable High Deî¿nition Audio Controller.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-29 JMicron SA T A/P A T A Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the JMicron Serial A T A/Parallel A T A controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] JMicron Controller Mode [Basic] Allows you to set the mode of the JMicron controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Raid] [Basic] [AHCI] JMicron SA T A/RAID BOOTROM [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the JMicron Serial A T A RAID boot ROM. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Setting the above item to [Disabled] may cause adverse effects. W e strongly [Disabled] may cause adverse effects. W e strongly recommend that you keep the default setting [Enabled]. Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3]
4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.7 PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS conîÂÂgures all the devices in the system. When set to [Y es] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conîÂÂgures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. ConîÂÂguration options: [No] [Y es] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register . ConîÂÂguration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Y es] When set to [Y es], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. ConîÂÂguration options: [No] [Y es] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the palette snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] T ake caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. NO : L ets th e BI OS co nî¿g ue all t he de vic es in th e sys tem . YE S: Let s t he op era tin g s ys te m co nî¿g ure Pl ug a nd Pla y (P nP) de vic es n ot re qui red fo r bo ot if yo ur sys tem h as a Plu g an d P lay op er at ing sy ste m.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-31 IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the speciîÂÂc IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved] 4.4.8 DH Feature page EZ Backup RAID Mode Change [Disabled] Options Enabled Disabled EZ Backup RAID Mode Change [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RAID mode change for the EZ-Backup feature. For detailed information about building an EZ-Backup RAID set, see section âÂÂ5.4.4 Silicon Image RAID conîÂÂguration.â ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM) features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced Con îÂÂgura tio n a nd Pow er Int erface (ACP I) sta te to be use d for system susp end . Sett ing th is it em to [Auto] allow s the OS to selec t the ACP I stat e. Con îÂÂgurat ion o pti ons: [ S1 (PO S) On ly] [S3 Only] [Auto] 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. Con îÂÂgurat ion op tions: [No] [Y es] 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [No] Allows you to add more tables for Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) 2.0 speciîÂÂcations. ConîÂÂguration options: [No] [Y es] 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conî¿guration Hardware Monitor Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-33 APM Conî¿guration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Go into On/Off or Suspend when Power button is pressed. 4.5.5 APM ConîÂÂguration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. ConîÂÂguration options: [On/Off] [Suspend] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to Power Off, the system goes into of f state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. ConîÂÂguration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The succeeding items appear when the Power On By RTC Alarm item is set to Enabled. RTC Alarm Date T o set the alarm date, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection. ConîÂÂguration options: [Everyday] [1] [2] [3]... ~ [31] RTC Alarm Hour T o set the alarm hour , highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection. ConîÂÂguration options: [00] [1]... ~ [23] RTC Alarm Minute T o set the alarm minute, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection. ConîÂÂguration options: [00] [1]... ~ [59]
4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup RTC Alarm Second T o set the alarm second, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection. ConîÂÂguration options: [00] [1]... ~ [59] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the îÂÂrst try . T urning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is of f causes an initialization string that turns the system power on. Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI LAN or modem card. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI Express device. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to use speciîÂÂc keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Space Bar] [Ctrl-Esc] [Power Key] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-35 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor AI Quiet [Enabled] CPU Temperature [54úC/129úF] MB Temperature [37úC/98.5úF] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [2884RPM] CPU Q-Fan Control [Enabled] [Enabled] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Fan Proî¿le [Optimal] [Optimal] Chassis Fan1 Speed (RPM) [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed (RPM) [N/A] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Enabled] Chassis Fan Proî¿le [Optimal] [Optimal] Power Fan1 Speed (RPM) [N/A] Power Fan2 Speed (RPM) [N/A] PWR Q-Fan Control [Enabled] PWR Fan Proî¿le [Optimal] Automatically optimize BIOS settings to minimize CPU FAN Speed according to system loading. VCORE Voltage [ 1.488V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.312V] 5V Voltage [ 5.324V] 12V Voltage [12.144V] Scroll down to display more items AI Quiet [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS AI Quiet feature. ASUS AI Quiet optimizes system performance by automatically adjusting the CPU fan speed according to the system loading. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] CPU T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] MB T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Ignored] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îÂÂeld shows N/A. Select [Ignored] from the item options to disable CPU fan speed monitoring.
4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup CPU Q-Fan Control [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the CPU Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efîÂÂcient system operation. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The CPU Q-Fan Mode and CPU Fan ProîÂÂle Mode items appear when you enable the ASUS Q-F AN Control feature. CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] Allows you to select the type of CPU fan cable connected to the CPU fan connector . Set to [PWM] when using a 4-pin CPU fan cable. Set to [DC] when using a 3-pin CPU fan cable. ConîÂÂguration options: [PWM] [DC] Some CPU fans with a 4-pin cable do not comply with Intel î âÂÂs PWM fan speciîÂÂcation. When using this type of CPU fan, you can not reduce the CPU fan speed even if you set the CPU Q-Fan Mode to [PWM]. CPU Fan ProîÂÂle [Optimal] Allows you to set the appropriate CPU fan performance. When set to [Optimal], the CPU fan automatically adjusts depending on the CPU temperature. Set this item to [Silent] to minimize fan speed for quiet CPU fan operation, or [Performance] to achieve maximum CPU fan speed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] Chassis Fan1/2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A]/[Ignored] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the chassis fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the chassis, the speciîÂÂc îÂÂeld shows N/A. Select [Ignored] from the item options to disable chassis fan speed monitoring. Chassis Q-Fan Control [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the chassis fan speeds for more efîÂÂcient system operation. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ⢠The Chassis Q-Fan function is available only on CHA_FAN1. ⢠The Chassis Fan ProîÂÂle Mode item appears when you enable the Chassis Q-Fan Control feature. Chassis Fan ProîÂÂle [Optimal] Allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the chassis Q-Fan. ConîÂÂguration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-37 Power Fan1/2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] or [Ignored] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected, the speciîÂÂc îÂÂeld shows N/A. Select [Ignored] from the item options to disable power fan speed monitoring. PWR Q-Fan Control [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the power fan speeds for more efîÂÂcient system operation. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] PWR Fan ProîÂÂle [Optimal] Allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the power Q-Fan. ConîÂÂguration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] VCORE V oltage, 3.3V V oltage, 5V V oltage, 12V V oltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators.
4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Boot Settings Boot Device Priority Hard Disk Drives Boot Settings Conî¿guration Security 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [PM-ST330620A] 3rd Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] Speciî¿es the Boot Device Priority sequence. A virtual îÂÂoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B:) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the î¿rst boot device. Speciî¿es the Boot Device Priority sequence. A virtual îÂÂoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B:) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the î¿rst boot device.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-39 4.6.2 Hard Disk Drives 1st ~ xxth Drive [ HDD: XXXXXXXX Drive ] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available hard disk drives. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] Boot Device Priority 1st Drive [HDD: XXXXXXXX Drive] 2nd Drive [HDD: XXXXXXXX Drive] Speciî¿es the Boot Device Priority sequence from available Hard Drives. 4.6.3 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration Boot Settings Conî¿guration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-40 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo 2 feature. Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. ConîÂÂguration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. ConîÂÂguration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] W ait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDEL â Message Display [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-41 4.6.4 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Sel ect th e Chan ge Sup ervis or Pas sword item, then pre ss <En ter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. ConîÂÂrm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. To cl ear th e su per vis or p ass wor d, se le ct the C ha nge Su per vi so r P ass wor d the n p res s <E nte r>. Th e me ssa ge âÂÂP as swo rd Uni ns ta lle dâ ap pe ars . If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section âÂÂ2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM.
4-42 Chapter 4: BIOS setup After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. ConîÂÂguration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility . View Only allows access but does not allow change to any îÂÂeld. Limited allows changes only to selected îÂÂelds, such as Date and T ime. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the îÂÂelds in the Setup utility . Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. ConîÂÂrm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully . T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-43 Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Setup] [Always] ASUS Music Alarm HASUS EZ Flash 4.7 Tools menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Onboard IDE Operate Mode should be set to [Compatible] Mode to ] Mode to Mode to enable Music Alarm for Intel chipset. Asus Music Alarm Option ASUS Music Alarm [Disabled] Detect CD [Enter] Starting Track [Disabled] Press ENTER to run the utility to select and update the BIOS. This utility does not support: 1. NTFS format 4.7.1 ASUS Music Alarm
4-44 Chapter 4: BIOS setup The succeeding items become user-conîÂÂgurable when you enable the ASUS Music Alarm. ASUS Music Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Music Alarm function. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Alarm Day: Sunday/Monday/T uesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/ Saturday [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the alarm for a particular day . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Alarm Time (hh:mm) 0 : 0 Allows you to set the alarm time. Press <T ab> to select the îÂÂeld, then use < > or <-> to change the value. Audio CD Device [Primary IDE Slave] Allows you to select the connection conîÂÂguration of the optical storage device from which the alarm music will play from. ConîÂÂguration options: [Primary IDE Master] [Primary IDE Slave] Detect CD Press <Enter> to search the CD track number . Starting T rack Allows you to choose the starting track from the CD from which you would like the alarm music to play . Repeat T rack [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the repeat track function. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Single] [All] Duration [10 Mins] Allows you to set the length of the music alarm. ConîÂÂguration options: [10 Mins] [20 Mins] [30 Mins] [1 Hour]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 4-45 V olume [16] Allows you to set the volume level of the music alarm. ConîÂÂguration options: [01] ~ [32] ⢠Only the IDE A T API devices from South bridge can support this functon. ⢠The system needs stanby power , so ensure that the power cord is plugged. ⢠Y ou can also set the alarm time under operating system using ASUS Music Alarm Utility . See section 5.3.6 for details. ⢠ASUS Music Alarm only supports audio CDs. 4.7.2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 Allows you to run ASUS EZ Flash 2. When you press <Enter>, a conîÂÂrmation message appears. Use the left/right arrow key to select between [Ok] or [Cancel], then press <Enter> to conîÂÂrm your choice. ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility B312 FLASH TYPE: Winbond W39V080A 8Mb LPC BOARD: P5W-DH Deluxe VER: 0014 [0100] DATE: 05/19/2006 Current ROM Update ROM BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown PATH: C:\ A: C: Note [Enter] Select [S] Save [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move WIN98SE <DIR> NETTERM <DIR> DRIVERS <DIR> RECYCLED <DIR> WUTEMP <DIR> NEWFOL~1 <DIR> INSTALL <DIR> TEST_REB <DIR> MSDOWNLD.TMP <DIR>
4-46 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to îÂÂelds other than System Date, System T ime, and Password, the BIOS asks for a conîÂÂrmation before exiting. Discard Changes Allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a conîÂÂrmation appears. Select OK to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults Allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a conîÂÂrmation window appears. Select OK to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM. Exit & Save Changes Once you are îÂÂnished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the computer is turned off. When you select this option, a conîÂÂrmation window appears. Select OK to save the changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. 4.8 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items.
5 Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary 5 5.1 Installing an operating system ................................................... 5-1 5.2 Support CD information .............................................................. 5-1 5.3 Software information ................................................................. 5-10 5.4 RAID conîÂÂgurations .................................................................. 5-29 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ....................................................... 5-64
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-1 5.1 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows î 2000/2003 Server/XP operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. 5.2 Support CD information The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. 5.2.1 Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary . Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only . Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Make sure that you install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack1 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability . If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the îÂÂle ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates. Click an icon to display support CD/motherboard information Click an item to install
5-2 Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.2 Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. ASUS InstAll -Drivers Installation Wizard Launches the ASUS InstallAll driver installation wizard. Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Installs the Intel î Chipset INF Update Program. This driver enables Plug-n-Play INF support for the Intel î chipset components on the motherboard. When installed to the target system, this driver provides the method for conîÂÂguring the chipset components. Y ou can install this utility using three different modes: interactive, silent or unattended preload. Installing the driver in interactive mode requires user input during installation. User input is not required when installing the driver in silent or unattended preload modes. Refer to the online help or readme îÂÂle that came with the utility for details. Realtek Audio Driver Installs the Realtek î ALC882M audio driver and application. See section âÂÂ5.3.3 Audio conîÂÂgurationsâ for details. JMicron JMB36X RAID Controller Driver Installs the JMicron î JMB363 RAID controller driver . Marvell Y ukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Installs the Marvell Y ukon Gigabit Ethernet LAN driver .
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-3 5.2.3 Utilities menu The Utilities menu displays the software applications and utilities that the motherboard supports. Click on an item to install. USB 2.0 Driver Installs the USB 2.0 driver . ASUS InstAll - Installation Wizard for Utilities Launches the ASUS InstallAll utilities installation wizard. Marvell Y ukon VCT Application Installs the Marvell î Y ukon Virtual Cable T ester⢠(VCT) application that diagnoses and reports LAN cable faults and shorts using the T ime Domain ReîÂÂectometry (TDR) technology . WiFi-AP Solo Installs the WiFi-AP Solo⢠utility , which allows a new level of versitility for your PC, enabling it to create a complete wireless home network in either AP or wirelesss client mode. ASUS DH Remote Installs the utility for the ASUS DH Remote, a handy remote controller that lets you operate key PC functions from a distance. Power on, adjust fan speed according to CPU loading for low noise and high power savings, and even control the media player with the one touch convenience.
5-4 Chapter 5: Software support ASUS PC Probe II This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you of any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer in healthy operating condition. ASUS Update The ASUS Update utility that allows you to update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. This utility requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). See page 4-8 for details. ASUS Ai Booster The ASUS Ai Booster application allows you to overclock the CPU speed in Windows î environment. Ez-Backup Manager Utility Installs the EzRaid Manager Utility for EZ Backup, which allows you to mirror your data instantaneously . EZ Backup leverages the Serial A T A 2 3.0/1.5 Gb/s technology to deliver handy plug-and-play RAID without requiring any conîÂÂguration or setup. Choose from either the default RAID 1 conîÂÂguration, or RAID 0 setting. See section âÂÂ5.4.4 Silicon Image RAID conîÂÂgurationâ for more information. ADOBE Acrobat Reader The Adobe Acrobat î Reader V7.0 is for opening, viewing, and printing documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). Microsoft DirectX 9.0c The Microsoft DirectX î 9.0c is a multimedia technology that enhances computer graphics and sounds. DirectX î improves the multimedia features of your computer so you can enjoy watching TV and movies, capturing videos, or playing games in your computer . Anti-virus Utility The anti-virus utility scans, identiîÂÂes, and removes computer viruses. View the online help for detailed information. Click to open the next screen.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-5 Click to view the previous screen. ASUS Screen Saver Bring life to your idle screen by installing the ASUS screen saver .
5-6 Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.4 Make Disk menu The Make Disk menu allows you to make RAID/Serial A T A driver disks for Intel ICH7R and JMicron software RAID. Intel ICH7R 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Intel ICH7R 64 bit RAID Driver Disk Allows you to create an Intel î ICH7R RAID driver disk for a 32/64-bit system. Make JMicron JMB36X 32/64-bit RAID Driver Allows you to create a JMicron JMB363 RAID driver disk for a 32/64-bit system.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-7 5.2.5 Manual menu The Manual menu contains the user manuals for third party components and applications. ⢠Most user manual îÂÂles are in Portable Document Format (PDF). Install the Adobe Acrobat Reader application from the Utilities tab before opening a user manual îÂÂle. ⢠The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates). 5.2.6 Contact information Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. Y ou can also îÂÂnd this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
5-8 Chapter 5: Software support Browse this CD Displays the contents of the support CD in graphical format. 5.2.7 Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen provide additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support CD. Click an icon to display the speciîÂÂed information. Motherboard Info Displays the general speciîÂÂcations of the motherboard.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-9 T echnical Support Form Displays the ASUS T echnical Support Request Form that you have to îÂÂll out when requesting technical support. Filelist Displays the contents of the support CD in text format.
5-10 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3 Software information Most of the applications in the support CD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme îÂÂle that came with the software application for more information. 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo 2 The ASUS MyLogo 2 utility lets you customize the boot logo. The boot logo is the image that appears on screen during the Power-On-Self-T ests (POST). The ASUS MyLogo3⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update utility from the support CD. See section âÂÂ5.2.3 Utilities menuâ for details. T o launch the ASUS MyLogo 2: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility . Refer to section âÂÂ4.1.5 ASUS Update utilityâ for details. 2. Select Options from the drop down menu, then click Next. 3. Check the option Launch MyLogo to replace system boot logo before îÂÂashing BIOS, then click Next. 4. Select Update BIOS from a îÂÂle from the drop down menu, then click Next. 5. When prompted, locate the new BIOS îÂÂle, then click Next. The ASUS MyLogo 2 window appears. 6. From the left window pane, select the folder that contains the image you intend to use as your boot logo. ⢠Before using the ASUS MyLogo 2, use the AFUDOS utility to make a copy of your original BIOS îÂÂle, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. See section âÂÂ4.1.2 AFUDOS utility .â â¢ Make sure that the BIOS item Full Screen Logo is set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogo3. See section âÂÂ4.6.2 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration.â â¢ Y ou can create your own boot logo image in BMP îÂÂle format. ⢠The îÂÂle size should be smaller than 150 K.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-11 9. When the screen returns to the ASUS Update utility , îÂÂash the original BIOS to load the new boot logo. 10. After îÂÂashing the BIOS, restart the computer to display the new boot logo during POST . 8. Adjust the boot image to your desired size by selecting a value on the Ratio box. 7. When the logo images appear on the right window pane, select an image to enlarge by clicking on it.
5-12 Chapter 5: Software support 3. Click the Run button to perform a cable test. 5.3.2 AI NET2 The AI NET2 features the Marvell î Virtual Cable T ester⢠(VCT). VCT is a cable diagnostic utility that reports LAN cable faults and shorts using the T ime Domain ReîÂÂectometry (TDR) technology . The VCT detects and reports open and shorted cables, impedance mismatches, pair swaps, pair polarity problems, and pair skew problems of up to 64 ns at one meter accuracy . The VCT feature reduces networking and support costs through a highly manageable and controlled network system. This utility can be incorporated in the network systems sofware for ideal îÂÂeld support as well as development diagnostics. Using the Virtual Cable T ester⢠T o use the the Marvell î Virtual Cable T ester⢠utility: 1. Launch the VCT utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable T ester . 2. Click Virtual Cable T ester from the menu to display the screen below . ⢠The VCT only runs on systems with Windows î XP or Windows î 2000 operating systems. ⢠The VCT utility only tests Ethernet cables connected to Gigabit LAN port(s). ⢠The Run button on the Virtual Cable T ester⢠main window is disabled if no problem is detected on the LAN cable(s) connected to the LAN port(s). ⢠If you want the system to check the status of the LAN cable before entering the OS, enable the item Post Check LAN Cable in the BIOS Setup.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-13 5.3.3 Audio conîÂÂgurations The Realtek î ALC882M audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your computer . The software provides Jack-Sensing function, S/PDIF Out support, and interrupt capability . The ALC882M also includes the Realtek î proprietary UAJ î (Universal Audio Jack) technology for all audio ports, eliminating cable connection errors and giving users plug and play convenience. Follow the installation wizard to install the Realtek î Audio Driver from the support CD that came with the motherboard package. If the Realtek audio software is correctly installed, you will îÂÂnd the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon on the taskbar . From the taskbar , double-click on the SoundEffect icon to display the Realtek HD Audio Manager . Realtek HD Audio Manager Control settings window ConîÂÂguration options Information button Realtek HD Audio Manager T ool button Dolby î feature launch buttons Exit button Minimize button
5-14 Chapter 5: Software support Information Click the information button ( ) to display information about the audio driver version, DirectX version, audio controller , audio codec, and language setting. T ools Click the tool button ( ) to display tools for supported Dolby î applications. Dolby î feature launch buttons Click the button of the feature you want to launch. Minimize Click the minimize button ( ) to minimize the window . Exit Click the exit button ( ) to exit the Realtek HD Audio Manager . ConîÂÂguration options Click any of the tabs in this area to conîÂÂgure your audio settings. Click the arrow button ( ) to display more options.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-15 Sound Effect The Realtek î ALC882M Audio CODEC allows you to set your listening environment, adjust the equalizer , set the karaoke, or select pre-programmed equalizer settings for your listening pleasure. T o set the sound effect options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Sound Effect tab. 2. Click the shortcut buttons or the drop-down menus for options on changing the acoustic environment or adjust the equalizer to your desired settings. 3. Click to effect the Sound Effect settings and exit. Mixer The Mixer option allows you to conîÂÂgure audio output (playback) volume and audio input (record) volume. T o set the mixer options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Mixer tab. 2. T urn the volume buttons to adjust the Playback and/or Record volume. The Mixer option activates voice input from all channels by default. Make sure to set those channels to mute ( ) if you do not want voice input. 3. Make adjustments to W ave, SW Synth, Front, Rear , Subwoofer , CD volume, Mic volume, Line V olume, and Stereo mix by clicking the control tabs and dragging them up and down until you get the desired levels. 4. Click to effect the Mixer settings and exit.
5-16 Chapter 5: Software support Bass Management setting Click this tab to manage your bass settings. T o set the bass management options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Bass Management setting tab. 2. Click <M> to display the distance in meters, or <FT> to display the distance in feet. 3. Adjust the values to your desired settings by entering a numeric value in the boxes, or clicking the up/down arrow . 4. Click to test your settings. 5. Click to effect the Bass Management settings and exit. Audio I/O The Audio I/O option allows you conîÂÂgure your input/output settings. T o set the Audio I/O options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Audio I/O tab. 2. Click the drop-down menu to select the channel conîÂÂguration. 3. The control settings window displays the status of connected devices. Click for analog and digital options. 4. Click <OK> to effect the Audio I/O settings and exit
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-17 Microphone The Microphone option allows you conîÂÂgure your input/output settings and to check if your audio devices are connected properly . T o set the Microphone options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Microphone tab. 2. Click the Noise Suppression option button to reduce the static background noise when recording. 3. Click the Acoustic Echo Cancellation option button to reduce the echo from the front speakers when recording. 4. Click to effect the Microphone settings and exit. 3D Audio Demo The 3D Audio Demo option gives you a demonstration of the 3D audio feature. T o start the 3D Audio Demo: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the 3D Audio Demo tab. 2. Click the option buttons to change the sound, moving path, or environment settings. 3. Click to test your settings. 4. Click to effect the 3D Audio Demo settings and exit.
5-18 Chapter 5: Software support Designed for Dolby î Master Studio Dolby î Master Studio combines advanced audio technologies to bring you the highest-quality in audio entertainment. Enjoy true home theatre experience with the following advanced sound technologies: Dolby Prologic IIx, Dolby Headphone, Dolby Virtual Speaker , and Dolby Digital Live. Dolby î Headphone: Allows you to wear any pair of headphones and listen to music with the dramatic surround effects of a 5.1-channel audio conîÂÂguration. Dolby î Pro Logic IIx: expands any stereo audio or 5.1-channel audio for a 6.1 or 7.1-channel playback, creating a seamless, natural surround soundîÂÂeld that immerses you in the entertainment experience. Dolby î Virtual Speaker: Simulates a highly realistic 5.1-speaker surround sound listening environment using only two speakers.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-19 Using Dolby î Digital Live⢠The Dolby î Digital Live⢠technology encodes your computer âÂÂs digital audio contents to real-time Dolby î Digital streams. Using the CODEC and the Sony/ Philips Digital Interface (S/PDIF) ports on the motherboard, you can send the encoded Dolby î Digital streams to an AC-3 decoder for playback on a multi- channel speaker system. Refer to the following illustrations when converting sounds to Dolby î Digital streams. Direct or non-encoded audio in your computer passes through the AC-3 encoder . 1 2 The AC-3 encoder converts the sound into Dolby î Digital streams. Realtek î ALC882M CODEC 3 The audio CODEC processes the streams then passes it to an AC-3 decoder through the S/PDIF out port. 4 The AC-3 decoder processes the streams then plays them back on a multi-channel speaker system. T o enable the Dolby î Digital Liveâ¢: 1. Connect an AC-3 decoder to the coaxial/optical S/PDIF out port. 2. Connect the AC-3 decoder to the multi-channel speaker system. 3. Launch the Realtek HD Audio Manager by double clicking the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon on the Windows î taskbar . 4. Click the Dolby Digital Live button. Y ou can now convert your computer âÂÂs audio content to Dolby î Digital streams.
5-20 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.4 ASUS PC Probe II PC Probe II is a utility that monitors the computer âÂÂs vital components, and detects and alerts you of any problem with these components. PC Probe II senses fan rotations, CPU temperature, and system voltages, among others. Because PC Probe II is software-based, you can start monitoring your computer the moment you turn it on. With this utility , you are assured that your computer is always at a healthy operating condition. Installing PC Probe II T o install PC Probe II on your computer: 1. Place the support CD to the optical drive. The Drivers installation tab appears if your computer has an enabled Autorun feature. If Autorun is not enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the setup.exe îÂÂle from the ASUS PC Probe II folder . Double-click the setup.exe îÂÂle to start installation. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click ASUS PC Probe II. 3. Follow the screen instructions to complete installation. Launching PC Probe II Y ou can launch the PC Probe II right after installation or anytime from the Windows î desktop. T o launch the PC Probe II from the Windows î desktop, click Start > All Programs > ASUS > PC Probe II > PC Probe II v1.00.43. The PC Probe II main window appears. After launching the application, the PC Probe II icon appears in the Windows î taskbar . Click this icon to close or restore the application. Using PC Probe II Main window The PC Pr obe II main windo w a llows you to vi ew the curre nt st atu s of you r syst em and chang e the ut ility con îÂÂgurat ion. B y defa ult, the main win dow di splays the P refer enc e sect ion. You can c lose o r rest ore t he Prefer ence sec tion b y clic king o n the tr iangle on th e mai n wind ow rig ht han dle. Click to close the Preference panel
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-21 Button Function Opens the ConîÂÂguration window Opens the Report window Opens the Desktop Management Interface window Opens the Peripheral Component Interconnect window Opens the Windows Management Instrumentation window Opens the hard disk drive, memory , CPU usage window Shows/Hides the Preference section Minimizes the application Closes the application Sensor alert When a system sensor detects a problem, the main window right handle turns red, as the illustrations below show . When displayed, the monitor panel for that sensor also turns red. Refer to the Monitor panels section for details. Preferences Y ou can customize the application using the Preference section in the main window . Click the box before each preference to activate or deactivate.
5-22 Chapter 5: Software support Hardware monitor panels The hardware monitor panels display the current value of a system sensor such as fan rotation, CPU temperature, and voltages. The hardware monitor panels come in two display modes: hexagonal (large) and rectangular (small). When you check the Enable Monitoring Panel option from the Preference section, the monitor panels appear on your computer âÂÂs desktop. Ch anging the monitor panels position T o change the position of the monitor panels in the desktop, click the arrow down button of the Scheme options, then select another position from the list box. Click OK when îÂÂnished. Moving the monitor panels All monitor panels move together using a magnetic effect. If you want to detach a monitor panel from the group, click the horseshoe magnet icon. Y ou can now move or reposition the panel independently . Adjusting the sensor threshold value Y ou can adjust the sensor threshold value in the monitor panel by clicking the or buttons. Y ou can also adjust the threshold values using the ConîÂÂg window . Yo u c ann ot ad ju st the s en sor th res ho ld va lue s i n a s ma ll mon it or ing pa nel . Large display Small display Click to increase value Click to decrease value
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-23 Monitoring sensor alert The monitor panel turns red when a component value exceeds or is lower than the threshold value. Refer to the illustrations below . Large display Small display WMI browser Click to display the WMI (Windows Management Instrumentation) browser . This browser displays various Windows î management information. Click an item from the left panel to display on the right panel. Click the plus sign ( ) before WMI Information to display the available information. Y ou can enlarge or reduce the browser size by dragging the bottom right corner of the browser . DMI browser Click to display the DMI (Desktop Management Interface) browser . This browser displays various desktop and system information. Click the plus sign ( ) before DMI Information to display the available information.
5-24 Chapter 5: Software support PCI browser Click to display the PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) browser . This browser provides information on the PCI devices installed on your system. Click the plus sign ( ) before the PCI Information item to display available information. Usage The Usage browser displays real-time information on the CPU, hard disk drive space, and memory usage. Click to display the Usage browser . CPU usage The CPU tab displays real-time CPU usage in line graph representation. If the CPU has an enabled Hyper-Threading, two separate line graphs display the operation of the two logical processors. Hard disk drive space usage The Hard Disk tab displays the used and available hard disk drive space. The left panel of the tab lists all logical drives. Click a hard disk drive to display the information on the right panel. The pie chart at the bottom of the window represents the used (blue) and the available HDD space.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-25 Memory usage The Memory tab shows both used and available physical memory . The pie chart at the bottom of the window represents the used (blue) and the available physical memory . ConîÂÂguring PC Probe II Click to view and adjust the sensor threshold values. The ConîÂÂg window has two tabs: Sensor/Threshold and Preference. The Sensor/ Threshold tab enables you to activate the sensors or to adjust the sensor threshold values. The Preference tab allows you to customize sensor alerts, or change the temperature scale. Loads the default threshold values for each sensor Applies your changes Cancels or ignores your changes Lo ad s y ou r s av ed co nî gur at ion Saves your conîÂÂguration
5-26 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.5 ASUS Music Alarm This motherboard is equipped with an audio alarm clock called ASUS Music Alarm. The ASUS Music Alarm gives you a personal wake-up called with your favorite CD music when the system is off. The onboard audio CODEC supports this feature, which requires an optical drive (CD-ROM, CD-RW , or DVD-ROM). ⢠Make sure that the power cord is plugged to a grounded power source so that the system has standby power . ⢠ASUS Music Alarm only supports audio CDs. ⢠ASUS Music Alarm will not work if you installed and enabled an add-on sound card. ⢠Only IDE A T API devices from the Southbridge support this feature. Hardware setup T o set up the hardware: 1. Connect the analog audio cable from the optical drive to the 4-pin CD-In connector labeled CD on the motherboard. See section âÂÂ2.7.2 Internal connectorsâ for the connector location. 2. Connect speakers or a headphone to the Line-Out (lime-colored) port on the front or rear panel for audio output. Y ou may also connect speakers or a headphone to the output jack on the optical drive. 3. Refer to the succeeding sections to make the appropriate settings in the BIOS or in Windows î . BIOS conîÂÂguration T o enable ASUS Music Alarm in the BIOS: 1. T urn on the system. 2. During POST , press <Del> to enter BIOS setup. 3. Go to the T ools menu, then select ASUS Music Alarm . 4. Set the ASUS Music Alarm item to [Enabled]. See section âÂÂ4.7.1 ASUS Music Alarmâ for details.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-27 OS conîÂÂguration T o conîÂÂgure ASUS Music Alarm in Windows î 1. Place the support CD into the optical drive. 2. Click the Utilities tab and choose ASUS Music Alarm to install the utility . 3. Insert an audio CD into the optical drive. 4. Launch the ASUS Music Alarm application by going to Start > ASUS > ASUS Music Alarm . The main window appears. Alarm information section shows the alarm time and days Music section shows the drive letter of the chosen optical drive and the starting track number to use as music alarm Minimize button Exit button Options section shows playing options 5. Click the arrow ( ) next to Time for Next Alarm in the Alarm information section. The Alarm T ime Setting panel appears. Set the days and time of the alarm, or enable/disable the Music Alarm feature. When done, click OK. 6. Click the arrow ( ) next to Music in the Music section. The Music Selection panel appears. Select the optical storage device, then choose the starting CD track number from which you would like the music alarm to play . When done, click OK.
5-28 Chapter 5: Software support 7. Click the arrow ( ) next to Options in the Options section. The Options panel appears. Disable or select the Repeat mode, then specify the length of the alarm music to play . Set the desired volume. When done, click OK. 8. After you have îÂÂnished making all the required settings, turn off the system. Adjusting the volume T o adjust the volume while the music alarm is playing: ⢠Use the <Up> or <Down> arrow key to increase or decrease the volume. T urning off the music alarm T o turn off the music alarm: ⢠Press any key to stop playing the CD and turn off the system. ⢠While the music alarm is playing, the system wake-up features (LAN, keyboard, mouse, PCI/PCIE device, modem) are deactivated. ⢠If the system loses connection or if it does not detect any optical drive or audio CD, the ASUS Music Alarm is automatically disabled/turned off. ⢠While the music alarm is playing, the optical drive front panel functions are automatically disabled. ⢠The ASUS Music Alarm works only when the system is off.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-29 5.4 RAID conî¿gurations The motherboard comes with four Serial A T A RAID solutions: ⢠ASUS EZ-Backup. Enabled by Silicon ImageâÂÂs SiI4723 controller , ASUS EZ-Backup provides ready-to-go hardware RAID for plug-and play RAID 1 and easy-to-conîÂÂgure RAID 0 sets of two hard disk drives ⢠Intel î ICH7R Southbridge RAID provides RAID level 5 support for three or more hard disk drives. ⢠Cross-RAID allows you to build a RAID 10 set through a cross-conîÂÂguration of ASUS EZ-Backup and Intel î ICH7R. ⢠JMicron î RAID. Enabled by JMicron î JMB363 controller , JMicron î RAID extends the advantages of software RAID beyond internal hard disk drives to an external disk or external, port-multiplier enabled enclosure While individually the RAID implementations offer advantages for speciîÂÂc applications, as a whole, this set of tools provides ultimate îÂÂexibility for every environment. Refer to the following RAID deîÂÂnitions for details. RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conîÂÂguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 conîÂÂguration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity . The RAID 5 conîÂÂguration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. RAID 10* is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 10* conîÂÂguration you get all the beneîÂÂts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conîÂÂgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. *T o build a RAID 10 set, you need to cross-conîÂÂgure Intel î ICH7R with Silicon Image î , which controls the EZ_RAID connectors for the EZ Backup feature. See section âÂÂ5.4.5 Cross-RAID conîÂÂgurationâ for details.
5-30 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.2 Intel î RAID conîÂÂgurations This motherboard supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10* (0 1) and Intel î Matrix Storage conîÂÂgurations for Serial A T A hard disks drives through the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge chip. 5.4.1 Installing Serial A T A hard disks The motherboard supports Serial A T A hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array . T o install the SA T A hard disks for a RAID conîÂÂguration: 1. Install the SA T A hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SA T A signal cables. 3. Connect a SA T A power cable to the power connector on each drive . See Chapter 4 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy îÂÂrst the RAID driver from the support CD to a îÂÂoppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ5.6 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. Intel î Matrix Storage. The Intel î Matrix Storage technology supported by the ICH7R chip allows you to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10* function to improve both system performance and data safety . Y ou can also combine two RAID sets to get higher performance, capacity , or fault tolerance provided by the difference RAID function. For example, RAID 0 and RAID 1 set can be created by using only two identical hard disk drives. *T o build a RAID 10 set, you need to cross-conîÂÂgure Intel î ICH7R with Silicon Image î , which controls the EZ_RAID connectors for the EZ Backup feature. See section âÂÂ5.4.5 Cross-RAID conîÂÂgurationâ for details. Setting the RAID item in BIOS Y ou must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set(s). T o do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST . 2. �o to th e Ma in Men u, se le ct IDE C on îÂÂgu rat ion , th en pre ss <E nte r>. 3. Select the item ConîÂÂgure SA T A As, then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. 4. Select RAID from the ConîÂÂgure SA T A As item options, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the item Onboard Serial-A T A BOOTROM, press <Enter>, then select Enabled from the options. 6. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-31 Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility The Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10 (RAID 0 1), and RAID 5 set(s) from Serial A T A hard disk drives that are connected to the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge. T o enter the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility: 1. Install all the Serial A T A hard disk drives. 2. T urn on the system. 3. During POST , press <Ctrl I> to display the utility main menu. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None deî¿ned. Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu The navigation keys at the bottom of the screen allow you to move through the menus and select the menu options. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen.
5-32 Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) T o create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 0(Stripe), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to conîÂÂgure as RAID. This pop-up screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume0 RAID0(Stripe) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ SELECT DISKS ] [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight a drive, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-33 6. Use the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 0 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu, or <N> to go back to the Create V olume menu. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing.
5-34 Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) T o create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 1(Mirror), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Capacity item is highlighted, key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 5. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A XX.X GB Create Volume WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 6. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to main menu or <N> to go back to Create V olume menu.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-35 Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) T o create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume5 RAID5(Parity) Select Disks 64KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select 2. Enter a name for the RAID 5 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 5(Parity), then press <Enter>. 4. The Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to conîÂÂgure as RAID. The following pop-up screen appears. [ SELECT DISKS ] Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete
5-36 Chapter 5: Software support 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the drive you want to set, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection. 6. When the Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 5 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create V olume menu. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter> when the Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-37 Deleting a RAID set T ake caution when deleting a RAID set. Y ou will lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set. T o delete a RAID set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 2. Delete RAID V olume, then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set you want to delete, then press <Del>. This window appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ DELETE VOLUME MENU ] Name Level Drives Capacity Status Bootable Volume0 RAIDX(xxxxx) X XXX.XGB Normal Yes [ HELP ] Deleting a volume will destroy the volume data on the drive(s) and cause any member disks to become available as non-RAID disks. WARNING: EXISTING DATA WITHIN THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE. [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<Del>]-Delete Volume 3. Press <Y> to delete the RAID set and return to the utility main menu; otherwise, press <N> to return to the Delete V olume menu. ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST! Are you sure you want to delete volume âÂÂVolumeXâÂÂ? (Y/N): [ DELETE VOLUME VERIFICATION ]
5-38 Chapter 5: Software support Exiting the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager utility T o exit the utility: 1. From the utility main menu, select 4. Exit, then press <Enter>. This window appears. Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N): [ CONFIRM EXIT ] 2. Press <Y> to exit or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. Resetting Disks to Non-RAID Take cauti on befo re you reset a RAID volum e HD D to n on-RAID . Rese tting a RAID volum e HDD d eletes all in ternal RAID stru cture on the drive. T o reset a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. From the utility main menu, select 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID, then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the RAID set drive you want to reset, then press <Space> to select. 3. Press <Enter> to reset the RAID set drive. A conîÂÂrmation message appears. 4. Press <Y> to reset the drive or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. [ RESET RAID DATA ] Resetting RAID data will remove internal RAID structures from the selected RAID disks. By removing these structures, the drive will revert back to a non-RAID disk. WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk Select the disks that should be reset. [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-39 Resetting a RAID set hard disks drive Take cauti on befo re you reset a RAID volum e HD D to n on-RAID . Rese tting a RAID volum e HDD d eletes all in ternal RAID stru cture on the drive. T o reset a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. From the utility main menu, select [3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID], then press <Enter> to display the following screen. Resetting RAID data will remove the internal RAID structures from the selected RAID disks. By removing these structures the drive will revert back to a Non-RAID disk. [ RESET RAID DATA ] WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.0GB Member Disk 1 STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.0GB Member Disk Select the disk that should be reset [ ]-Previous/Next [Space]-Selects [Enter]-Selection Complete 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the RAID set drive you want to reset, then press <Space> to select. 3. Press <Enter> to reset the RAID set drive. A conîÂÂrmation window appears. 4. Press <Y> to reset the drive; otherwise, press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5. Follow steps 2 to 4 to select and reset other RAID set drives.
5-40 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.3 JMicron î RAID ConîÂÂguration The JMicron î Serial A T A controller allows you to conîÂÂgure RAID 0 and RAID 1 sets on the external Serial A T A hard disk drives. Before creating a RAID set Prepare the following items: 1. T wo HDDs, preferably with the same model and capacity . 2. A write-enabled îÂÂoppy disk 3. Microsoft î Windows î OS installation disk (Windows 2000/XP/2003) 4. Motherboard support CD with JMB363 driver Complete the following steps before you create a RAID set: 1. Install the external Serial A T A hard disk drives (HDDs) on your system. 2. Set the JMicron Controller Mode item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Devices ConîÂÂgurationâ for details. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2005, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conî¿gure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Onboard PCIE GbE LAN_1 [Enabled] Onboard PCIE GbE LAN_2 [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] JMicron SATA/PATA Controller [Enabled] JMicron Controller Mode [RAID] JMicron SATA/RAID BOOTROM [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] 3. Enter the JMB363 RAID BIOS utility to set up your RAID conîÂÂguration. 4. Create a JMB363 RAID driver disk for Windows î OS installation. See section âÂÂ5.5 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. 5. Install the JMB363 driver after the Windows î OS had been installed. Options Enabled Disabled
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-41 Entering the JMB363 RAID BIOS utility 1. During POST , press <Ctrl-J> to enter the JBM363 RAID BIOS menu. 2. The main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu appears. 3. Use the arrow keys to move the color bar and navigate through the items. Creating a RAID set 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Create RAID Disk Drive using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. J M ic r o n T e c h no l o g y C o r p . P C I -t o - S A TA I I /I D E R AI D C on t r o l le r B IO S v 0. 9 7 Co pyri ght (C ) 20 04- 2005 JM icr on T ech nol ogy ht tp: //w ww. j mic ron .co m HDD0 : HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB Non-RAID HDD1 : HDS722516DLA380 164 GB Non-RAID Press <Ctrl-J> to enter RAID Setup Utility... [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving J M ic r o n T e c h no l o g y C o r p . P C I -t o - S A TA I I /I D E R AI D C on t r o l le r B IO S v 0. 9 7 [ TAB]-Switch Window [ âÂÂâÂÂ]-Select Item [ENTER]-Action [ESC]-Exit [Hard Disk Drive List] Model Name Capacity Type/Status HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB Non-RAID HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB Non-RAID [RAID Disk Drive List] [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving
5-42 Chapter 5: Software support 2. When the Level item is highlighted, use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set that you want to create. 3. When the Disks item is highlighted, use the up/down arrow key to highlight an HDD that you want to belong to the RAID set, then press the space bar to conîÂÂrm selection. Repeat the process until the HDDs are selected. A selected HDD shows a sign before it. 4. Key in the RAID volume capacity . Use the up/down arrow to choose the block size. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . [Create New RAID] Name : JRAID Level: 0-Stripe Disks: Select Disk Block: 128 KB Size : 319 GB Conî¿rm Creation [Create New RAID] Name : JRAID Level: 1-Mirror Disks: Select Disk Block: N/A Size : 159 GB Conî¿rm Creation [Hard Disk Drive List] Model Name Capacity Type/Status HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 XXX GB Non-RAID HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 XXX GB Non-RAID [Create New RAID] Name : JRAID Level: 0-Stripe Disks: Select Disk Block: 128 KB Size : 319 GB Conî¿rm Creation
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-43 5. When done, press <Enter> to conîÂÂrm the creation of the RAID set. A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. Pressing <Y> deletes all the data in the HDDs. 6. The following screen appears, displaying the relevant information about the RAID set you created. [RAID Disk Drive List] M od el N a me R AI D L e v el Ca p ac it y St at u s M e mb e r s (H DD x) RDD0: JRAID 0-Stripe XXX GB Normal 01 J M ic r o n T e c h no l o g y C o r p . P C I -t o - S A TA I I /I D E R AI D C on t r o l le r B IO S v 0. 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mo del Na me C apa cit y Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB Non-RAID HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB Non-RAID [RAID Disk Drive List] [Create New RAID] Name: JRAID Level: 0-Stripe Disks: Select Disk Block: 128 KB Size : 319 GB Conî¿rm Creation Create RAID on the selected HDD (Y/N)? Y
5-44 Chapter 5: Software support Deleting a RAID set 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Delete RAID Disk Drive using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. 2. Use the space bar to select the RAID set you want to delete. A selected set shows a sign before it. Press the <Del> key to delete the set. 3. A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. Pressing <Y> deletes all the data in the HDDs. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving J M ic r o n T e c h no l o g y C o r p . P C I -t o - S A TA I I /I D E R AI D C on t r o l le r B IO S v 0. 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mo del Na me C apa cit y Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB RAID Inside HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB RAID Inside [RAID Disk Drive List] Mo d e l Na me R AI D Le ve l Ca pa ci ty St a tu s M em be rs (H D D x) R DD 0: JRAID 0-Stripe XXX GB Normal 01 [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving ALL DATA ON THE RAID WILL BE LOST!! ARE YOU SURE TO DELETE (Y/N)? Y [ TAB]-Switch Window [ âÂÂâÂÂ]-Select Item [ENTER]-Action [ESC]-Exit
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-45 Resetting disks to non-RAID T o reset disks to non-RAID: 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Revert HDD to non-RAID using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. 2. Use the space bar to select the HDD that you want to reset to non-RAID. A selected HDD shows a sign before it. 3. A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving Pressing <Y> deletes all the data in the HDD. An HDD that has been previously conîÂÂgured as part of another RAID set in another platform is called a broken RAID HDD. When you install a broken RAID HDD, you cannot select this HDD when conîÂÂguring a RAID set through the JMB363 utility . If you still want to use this broken RAID HDD as part of the RAID set conîÂÂgured through the JMB363, you may do so by resetting the disk to non-RAID. Y ou will, however , lose all data and previous RAID conîÂÂgurations.
5-46 Chapter 5: Software support Repairing a Mirror conîÂÂict A Mirror conîÂÂict occurs when one or both disks in a RAID 1 (Mirror) conîÂÂguration are unplugged from the system, then plugged in again. Since both disks contain exactly the same data, the system will be unable to determine which of the two is the source drive. This option allows you to set the source drive and rebuild the Mirror drive according to the contents of the source drive. T o repair a Mirror conîÂÂict: 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. 2. Use the space bar to select the HDD that you want to set as source drive. The selected HDD shows a sign before it. 3. Using the <T AB>, move to the RAID Disk Drive List menu and highlight the RAID set that you want to rebuild. Press <Del> to begin rebuilding the Mirror conîÂÂguration. A status bar at the bottom of the screen shows the progress of the rebuilding. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving J M ic r o n T e c h no l o g y C o r p . P C I -t o - S A TA I I /I D E R AI D C on t r o l le r B IO S v 0. 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mo del Na me C apa cit y Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB RAID Inside HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB RAID Inside [RAID Disk Drive List] Mo d e l Na me R AI D Le ve l Ca pa ci ty St a tu s M em be rs (H D D x) RDD0: JRAID 1-Mirror XXX GB Rebuild 01 [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Repair Mirror ConîÂÂict Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving Rebuilding... 01%, please wait...
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-47 Saving the settings and exiting setup When you have îÂÂnished, highlight Save & Exit Setup using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter> to save the current RAID conîÂÂguration and exit the JMB363 RAID BOS utility . A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N> to return to the JMB RAID BIOS menu.
5-48 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.4 Silicon Image î RAID conîÂÂguration The Silicon Image î 4723 Serial A T A controller allows you to build RAID sets on the ASUS EZ-Backup Serial A T A hard disk drives. About ASUS EZ-Backup ASUS EZ-Backup is an ASUS exclusive feature that allows you to build a RAID set easily . Without any conîÂÂguration or BIOS setting required, you can create a RAID 1 set by simply plugging in two Serial A T A hard disks to the onboard EZ_RAID connectors. Simply install the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager , and you are ready to mirror your data. ASUS EZ-Backup secures your data and saves you from complex conîÂÂgurations, troublesome setups, and complicated BIOS settings. Refer to the succeeding sections to conîÂÂgure other RAID sets. RAID modes supported ASUS EZ-Backup supports the following RAID modes: 1. SAFE / RAID 1 (Data mirroring) is storage policy in which all data are stored in duplicate on separate drives to protect against data loss due to drive failure. One drive mirrors the other at all times. This mode is equivalent to RAID 1. Every write operation goes to both drives. Safe provides the highest level of data protection, but halves the amount of storage space because all data must be stored twice. If one drive fails, the Safe volume is in a vulnerable state because its mirrored hard drive is inaccessible. When the ofîÂÂine drive comes back online, the îÂÂrmware begins a rebuild process immediately to restore data redundancy . A message box appears in the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager graphical user interface (GUI) to notify you that a rebuild is in progress. Although the volume remains available during the rebuild process, the volume is susceptible to data loss through damage to the remaining drive until redundancy is restored at the end of the rebuild and veriîÂÂcation process. Host access takes precedence over the rebuild process. If you continue to use the Safe volume during the rebuild, the rebuild process will take a longer time to complete. T o implement the Safe storage policy , the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager creates one volume. One hard drive mirrors the other . 2. F AST / RAID 0 (Data striping) is a storage policy in which I/O processing is balanced evenly in a method known as striping. This mode equivalent to RAID 0. Striping increases storage operation speed because each portion of data is divided into segments that are written to different disks simultaneously . Fast offers the best performance, but no data redundancy because there is no way to retrieve or reconstruct data on a failed drive. T o implement the Fast storage policy , the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager creates a single volume that is striped across both hard drives.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-49 Building a RAID 1 set for the îÂÂrst time The ASUS EZ-Backup advantage is that you can build a RAID 1 set without any jumper or BIOS setting. When creating a RAID 1 set for the îÂÂrst time, you can follow these simple steps. 1. Prepare two Serial A T A hard disk drives (HDDs). Plug one end of the Serial A T A cable to the rear interface on each drive and plug the other end of the cable to the motherboard connectors labeled EZ_RAID1 and EZ_RAID2 (colored light orange). Refer to section âÂÂ2.7.2 Internal connectorsâ for the location of the connectors. For best results, use Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s hard disk drives listed in the EZ-Backup compatibility list. Visit the ASUS website at www.asus.com for details. 2. Connect a Serial A T A power cable or a 4-pin legacy power connector from the power supply unit to the rear power connector on each drive. Using both the SA T A power cable and 4-pin power connector simultaneously will cause damage to the system. 3. Install the operating system. 4. Install the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager utility from the support CD that came with the motherboard package. 5. Reboot the computer . 3. BIG is storage policy in which multiple physical drives are concatenated and treated as one large volume. This conîÂÂguration allows you to increase virtual volume size beyond the capacity of individual drives. Big provides the maximum amount of storage space, but no additional performance or data redundancy . T o implement the Big storage policy , the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager concatenates both hard drives into a single volume. . Before creating a RAID set Prepare the following items: 1. T wo Serial A T A hard disk drives (HDDs)., preferably with the same model and capacity . 2. Motherboard support CD with ASUS EZ-Backup Manager
5-50 Chapter 5: Software support Creating a Big/Fast RAID set for the îÂÂrst time 1. Set the EZ-Backup jumper mode. Refer to the jumper settings below for the respective RAID modes supported. ⢠For best results, use Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s hard disk drives listed in the EZ-Backup compatibility list. Visit the ASUS website at www.asus.com for details. ⢠The total RAID disk volume size should be less than 2.1 T erabytes (TB). If you do not change the jumper setting on îÂÂrst installation, the system applies the default RAID mode, which is RAID 1. 2. Prepare two Serial A T A hard disk drives (HDDs). Plug one end of the Serial A T A cable to the rear interface on each drive and plug the other end of the cable to the motherboard connectors labeled EZ_RAID1 and EZ_RAID2 (colored light orange). Refer to section âÂÂ2.7.2 Internal connectorsâ for the location of the connectors. 3. Connect a Serial A T A power cable or a 4-pin legacy power connector from the power supply unit to the rear power connector on each drive. Using both the SA T A power cable and 4-pin power connector simultaneously will cause damage to the system. P5W DH DELUXE î P5W DH DELUXE RAID Setting RA ID _S EL RAID1 (Default) 1 BIG mode 1 [Fast mode] 1 RAID0 [Safe mode]
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-51 6. Install the operating system. 7. Install the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager utility from the support CD that came with the motherboard package. Changing RAID modes T o change from one RAID mode to another , follow steps 1, 4, and 5 of the previous section, âÂÂCreating a Big/Fast RAID set for the îÂÂrst time.â RAID mode change will destroy any data on the hard disk drives. Backup existing data before changing RAID modes. 4. Enter the BIOS setup during POST . Go to Advanced menu > DH Feature page. Set the EZ Backup RAID Mode Change item to Enabled. Make sure you have made the above BIOS setting.If you changed the jumper settings but did not enable the EZ Backup RAID Mode Change, the system applies the default RAID mode, which is RAID 1. 5. Press <F10> to save and exit. The system will restart. The following message appears after you exit the BIOS utility . EZ Backup RAID Mode will change. Press F1 to continue.
5-52 Chapter 5: Software support Using the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager After rebooting the computer and entering Windows î again, you will îÂÂnd an icon shortcut for the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager utility on your desktop or taskbar . Launching the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager T o launch the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager , double-click on your desktop or on the taskbar . Y ou may also go to Start > Programs > EzBackup > EzBackupManager. Status window The ASUS EZ-Backup Manager status window allows you to monitor the devices connected to the host computer . ConîÂÂgure pop-ups Serial number Drive status and information Capacity information V olume information Event log Specify îÂÂrmware Refresh button Quit button When you create a RAID 10 set through a cross conîÂÂguration, you cannot use the EZ-Backup Manager utility to view the status of hard disks installed on the EZ_RAID1 and EZ_RAID2 connectors. Screen captures shown in the section are provided for your reference only , and may change any time without notice.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-53 Scan Devices. Refreshes the information shown on the status window . Change Connection. Opens a dialog box that allows you to change remote connection settings. Exit. Quits the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager . File menu The File menu allows you to change the password, scan devices, change connection, and exit the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager . Change Password. Opens a dialog box that allows you to change the default password, admin. T o change this, key in a new password, then retype the new password. Press <OK> to set. Serial number . Displays the serial number of the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager . Drive status and information. Displays the current status and serial number of each drive member of the RAID set. Below is a list of possible drive states: 1. Normal 2. Rebuilding 3. V erifying 4. Unplugged 5. Needs rebuild 6. New drive 7. Wrong slot 8. Use bigger drive Capacity information. Displays the maximum capacity of each drive member of the RAID set. V olume information. Shows the RAID mode, total volume of the RAID set, and maximum capacity of each drive member of the RAID set.
5-54 Chapter 5: Software support Event log. Click this button to display the record of events for storage devices installed. Specify îÂÂrmware. Click this button to view the current îÂÂrmware version or to update the îÂÂrmware. ConîÂÂgure pop-ups. Click this button to open a window that allows you to enable or disable pop-up display , and specify the number of seconds for the pop-ups to remain on screen. Edit menu The File menu allows you to conîÂÂgure pop-ups, view event logs, and view/update the current îÂÂrmware.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-55 Partitioning volumes Y ou need to partition the hard disk drive volumes for the operating system before you can store/backup data on the drive. Before partitioning volumes, back up your data and delete any previously deîÂÂned partition. 3. Under Storage, select Disk Management. The Windows î Disk Manager opens. T o partition volumes: 1. Boot your computer and enter the Windows î operating system. 2. Right-click My Computer on your desktop. Select Manage from the pop-up window .
5-56 Chapter 5: Software support The disk number on Windows Disk Manager may not be the same as the disk number shown on the ASUS EZ-Backup Manager . Make sure you select the correct disk by checking the total disk capacity information. 5. Right-click the diskâÂÂs unallocated space, then select New Partition . 4. Select the disk you want to partition. The screen captures in this section are provided for your reference only . The appearance of the screen and items in it may vary , depending on the operating system you installed.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-57 6. The Partition Wizard opens. Click Next to start the partition process. 7. Select the type of partition you want to create. Click Next. 8. Specify your desired partition size. The default partition size is the entire volume. Click Next.
5-58 Chapter 5: Software support 9. Assign a drive letter or drive path to the partition. Click Next. 1 1. The New Partition Wizard displays the îÂÂle system settings. Make sure the settings are correct. Click Finish to create the partition; otherwise, click Back to make the necessary changes. 10. Name and format the partition. Click Next.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-59 Rebuilding a hard disk drive ASUS EZ-Backup will rebuild a RAID 1 set after a failed hard disk drive is replaced with a functioning HDD, or the mirror becomes unsynchronized when a working hard disk drive is removed, then returned. This function applies only to a RAID 1 (SAFE) set. The following message pops up when a hard disk drive is unplugged: T o rebuild: 1. Plug in the Serial A T A cable to the available EZ_RAID connector . 2. Rebuilding starts. The Box Status cell displays the rebuilding progress. Note that the box is colored orange. 3. When done, the following message pops up. Click OK
5-60 Chapter 5: Software support 4. When done, click Refresh to update the information. If rebuilding is successful, the status displays Normal and the box color changes to green.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-61 5.4.5 Cross-RAID ConîÂÂguration: Creating a RAID 10 set with ASUS EZ-Backup and Intel ICH7R î A RAID 10 set requires four HDDs. The onboard RAID controller on the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge, however , controlls only three Serial A T A connectors. T o build a RAID 10 set, you need to cross-conîÂÂgure Intel î ICH7R with Silicon Image î , which controls the EZ_RAID connectors for the EZ-Backup feature. Refer to the succeeding sections to build a RAID 10 set. Hardware setup 1. Install one Serial A T A HDD on the motherboard connector labeled EZ_RAID1. 2. Install three Serial HDDs on the motherboard connectors labled SA T A1, SA T A3, and SA T A4. EZ Backup jumper setting and BIOS configuration For information on EZ-Backup jumper setting and BIOS conîÂÂguration, see section âÂÂ5.4.4 Silicon Image RAID conîÂÂguration.â 1. After installing the Serial A T A hard disks, set the jumper setting to the default RAID 1 mode. 2. T urn the system on, and enter the BIOS setup during POST . Go to Advanced menu > DH Feature page. Set the EZ Backup RAID Mode Change item to Enabled (if the jumper setting has been changed). 3. Press <F10> to save and exit. The system will restart.
5-62 Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 10 set using the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility T o create a RAID 10 set: 1. T urn on the system. 2. During POST , press <Ctrl I> to display the utility main menu. 3. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume10 RAID10(RAID0 1) Select Disks 128KB XXX.X GB Create Volume [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select 4. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 5. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 10(RAID0 1), then press <Enter>. 6. When the Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 10 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-63 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want then press <Enter> when the Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create V olume menu. 10. The main menu appears as follows after you have created the RAID 10 set. The HDD connected to the EZ_RAID connector is identiîÂÂed as âÂÂExternal Disk.â Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.1.2.1002 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: ID Name Level Strip Size Status Bootable 0 Volume0 RAID10(RAID0 1) XXKB XXX.XX GB Normal Yes Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Member Disk (0) 1 External Disk 0 XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Member Disk (0) 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Member Disk (0) 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Member Disk (0) [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu [ MAIN MENU ] When you create a RAID 10 set through a cross conîÂÂguration, you cannot use the EZ-Backup Manager utility to view the status of hard disks installed on the EZ_RAID1 and EZ_RAID2 connectors. Intel î Matrix Storage cannot read the hard disk drive information on the ASUS EZ-Backup connectors.
5-64 Chapter 5: Software support 5.5.2 Creating a RAID driver disk in Windows î T o create a RAID driver disk in Windows î : 1. Start Windows î . 2. Place the motherboard support CD into the optical drive. 3. Go to the Make Disk menu, then click Intel ICH7R 32/64 bit RAID Driver Disk to create an Intel î ICH7R RAID driver disk or the Make JMicron JMB36X 32/64-bit RAID Driver to create a JMicron JMB363 RAID driver disk. 4. Insert a îÂÂoppy disk into the îÂÂoppy disk drive. 5. Follow succeeding screen instructions to complete the process. Write-protect the îÂÂoppy disk to avoid computer virus infection. 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk A îÂÂoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000/XP and later operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. Y ou do not need to create a RAID driver disk if you will create a Safe, Big, or Fast RAID set through the ASUS EZ-Backup. 5.5.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS T o create a RAID driver disk without entering the OS: 1. Boot your computer . 2. Press <Del> during POST to enter the BIOS setup utility . 3. Set the optical drive as the primary boot device. 4. Insert the support CD into the optical drive. 5. Save changes and exit BIOS. 6. Press any key when the system prompts âÂÂPress any key to boot from the optical drive.â 7. When the menu appears, press <1> to create a RAID driver disk. 8. Insert a formatted îÂÂoppy disk into the îÂÂoppy drive then press <Enter>. 9. Follow succeeding screen instructions to complete the process.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 5-65 T o install the RAID driver: 1. During the OS installation, the system prompts you to press the F6 key to install third-party SCSI or RAID driver . 2. Press <F6> then insert the îÂÂoppy disk with RAID driver into the îÂÂoppy disk drive. 3. When prompted to select the SCSI adapter to install, make sure you select Intel(R) 82801GH/GM SA T A RAID Controller (Desktop ICH7R/DH) and JMicron JMB363. 4. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation.
5-66 Chapter 5: Software support
6 This chapter tells how to install A TI î CrossFire⢠graphics cards to avail of A TIâÂÂs Multi-Video Processing technology . ATI î CrossFire⢠technology support
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary 6 6.1 Overview ....................................................................................... 6-1 6.2 Installing CrossFire⢠graphics cards ....................................... 6-2 6.3 Software information ................................................................... 6-5
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 6-1 6.1 Overview The motherboard supports the A TI î CrossFire⢠technology that allows you to install multi-graphics processing units (GPU) graphics cards. Follow the installation procedures in this section. 6.1.1 Requirements ⢠CrossFire⢠Edition graphics card (Master) ⢠CrossFireâ¢-ready graphics card (Slave) ⢠CrossFireâ¢-ready motherboard, such as the ASUS P5W DH Deluxe motherboard. ⢠Make sure that your power supply unit (PSU) can provide at l east the minimum power required by your system. See âÂÂ14. Power connectorsâ on page 2-40 for details. 6.1.2 Before you begin Uninstall other graphics card drivers in your system T o uninstall other graphics card drivers: 1. Close all current applications. 2. Go to Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs. 3. Select your current graphics card driver/s. 4. Select Add/Remove. 5. Restart your system. ⢠Visit the ATI website or download the Radeon î îÂÂX850îÂÂCrossîÂÂreâ¢î EditionîÂÂUserâÂÂsîÂÂGuideîÂÂfromîÂÂtheîÂÂsupportîÂÂCDîÂÂforîÂÂdetailedîÂÂhardwareî requirements and installation procedures. ⢠The ATI CrossFire⢠technology supports only the following operating systems: - Windows î XP 32-bit (Home or Professional) with Service Pack 2 (SP2) - Windows î XP Professional 64-bit Edition. ⢠Make sure that your graphics card driver supports the ATI î CrossFire⢠Technology. Download the latest driver from the ATI website (www.ati.com) ⢠The maximum resolution of Radeon⢠X850 CrossFire⢠Edition is 1600 x 1200 at 65 MHz when you use DVI output.
6-2 Chapter 6: A TI î MVP technology support Slave graphics card Master graphics card 2. Insert the CrossFire⢠Edition (Master) graphics card into the PCI Express x16 orange slot. Make sure that the card is properly seated on the slot. 6.2 Installing CrossFire⢠graphics cards Before ins talling a CrossFire⢠system, refer to the user guide that came with the A TI î CrossFire⢠Edition graphics card. T o install the graphics cards: 1. Prepare one CrossFire⢠Edition (Master) graphics card and one CrossFireâ¢-ready (Slave) graphics card.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 6-3 3. Insert the CrossFireâ¢-ready (Slave) graphics card into the PCI Express x16 black slot. Make sure that the card is properly seated on the slot. 4. Connect an auxiliary power source from the power supply to the graphics cards.
6-4 Chapter 6: A TI î MVP technology support 6. Connect the other end of the external cable to the Slave graphics card. 7. Connect the loose end to the corresponding port on your monitor . 5. Connect one end of the external cable to the Master graphics card. 7 6
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 6-5 6.3 Software information 6.3.1 Installing the device drivers Refer to the documentation that came with your graphics card package to install the device drivers. The A TI CrossFire⢠technology supports only the following operating systems: ⢠Windows î XP 32-bit (Home or Professional) with Service Pack 2 (SP2) ⢠Windows î XP Professional 64-bit Edition. 1. T urn on your system and log in with administrator rights. 2. Windows î auto-detects the CrossFire⢠graphics cards and displays the Found New Hardware Wizard window . Click Cancel . 3. Place the CrossFire⢠installation CD in your optical drive and install drivers from the opening menu. 4. Click Next to continue from the installation window that appears. 5. Read the License Agreement, then click Y es .
6-6 Chapter 6: A TI î MVP technology support 6. Select the components that you want to install, then click Next. Setup prepares the installation wizard that will guide you to setup process. Windows automatically conîÂÂgures the A TI Catalyst Control Center . The status windows indicates the progress of the installation. 7. The Setup Complete window appears, indicating that the driver îÂÂles have been copied to your computer . Click Y es to restart your computer now or No to restart later 8. Click Finish. ⢠Select Express to install the HydraVision⢠multi-monitor and desktop management software, as well as the A TI driver . ⢠Select Custom to individually choose desired software components.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 6-7 6.3.2 Using the Catalyst⢠Control Center The Catalyst⢠Control Center allows you to access display features of the A TI hardware and software you installed. Use this application to adjust your graphic settings, enable/disable connected devices, and change your desktop orientation. Launching the Catalyst⢠Control Center There are several ways to launch the Catalyst⢠Control Center: ⢠On the Windows î task bar , click Start > A TI Catalyst⢠Control Center > Catalyst⢠Control Center ⢠Double-click the Catalyst⢠Control Center desktop shortcut. ⢠On the Windows î task bar , double- click the Catalyst⢠Control Center icon.
6-8 Chapter 6: A TI î MVP technology support The Catalyst⢠Control Center Dialog Box View The Catalyst⢠Control Center provides two views: ⢠Standard - simple view with wizards for beginners ⢠Advance - allows advanced users to access and conîÂÂgure the complete features of the software Set to Advance view to enable the CrossFire⢠function.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 6-9 T o enable CrossFireâ¢: 1. Set the view to Advance. 2. Click the CrossîÂÂre⢠item in �raphics Settings. 3. In the CrossFire⢠Settings dialog, tick the box opposite Enable CrossFire⢠. 4. Click OK to effect the setting. 2 3 4 Hotkeys Click the Hotkeys tab on the Catalyst⢠Control Center to access the Hotkeys Manager , which allows you to create key combinations as shortcuts for performing certain functions quickly .
6-10 Chapter 6: A TI î MVP technology support ProîÂÂles Click the ProîÂÂles tab on the Catalyst⢠Control Center to access the ProîÂÂles Manager , which allows you to create customized environments for your desktop, video, and 3D applications. Preferences Click the Preferences tab on the Catalyst⢠Control Center to select a language, restore defaults, change skins, or enable/disable the System T ray icon.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe 6-1 1 Help Click the Help tab on the Catalyst⢠Control Center to access the online help system, generate a Problem Report, and get the Catalyst⢠Control Center version information.
6-12 Chapter 6: A TI î MVP technology support
A CPU features The Appendix describes the CPU features and technologies that the motherboard supports.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe Chapter summary A A.1 Intel î EM64T .................................................................................. A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) ........................ A-1 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading T echnology ........................................... A-3
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe A.1 Intel î EM64T Using the Intel î EM64T feature T o use the Intel î EM64T feature: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Intel î EM64T . 2. Install a 64-bit operating system (Windows î XP Professional x64 Edition or Windows î Server 2003 x64 Edition). 3. Install the 64-bit drivers for the motherboard components and devices from the support CD. 4. Install the 64-bit drivers for expansion cards or add-on devices, if any . A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) ⢠The motherboard is fully compatible with Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors running on 32-bit operating systems. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EM64T . Y ou can download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the ASUS website (www .asus.com/ support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS îÂÂle. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www .intel.com for more information on the EM64T feature. ⢠Vi sit www .mi cro sof t.c om fo r mo re inf orm atio n o n W ind ows î 64-bit OS. Refe r to t he expa nsion card or add-o n devi ce(s ) docu mentati on, or visit the rela ted we bsite, to ver ify if the ca rd/dev ice suppor ts a 64 -bit s ystem. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EIST . Y ou can download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the ASUS website (www .asus.com/ support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www .intel.com for more information on the EIST feature. A.2.1 System requirements Before using EIST , check your system if it meets the following requirements: ⢠In tel î Pentium î 4 processor with EIST support ⢠BIOS îÂÂle with EIST support ⢠Operating system with EIST support (Windows î XP SP2/Windows î Server 2003 SP1/Linux 2.6 kernel or later versions)
A-2 Appendix: CPU features A.2.2 Using the EIST T o use the EIST feature: 1. Tur n o n t he com put er , the n e nte r th e B IOS S et up. 2. Go to the Ad van ced M en u, hig hli gh t CPU Co nîÂÂg ur ati on , then press <Enter>. 3. Set the Intel(R) SpeedStep T echnology item to [Automatic], then press <Enter>. See page 4-25 for details. 4. Pre ss <F1 0> to sav e yo ur cha nge s an d e xit t he BI OS set up . 5. Aft er the co mpu ter r es tar ts, ri gh t cli ck on a bl ank sp ac e on the d es kto p, the n se lec t P rop er ti es fro m th e p op- up me nu . 6. Whe n t he Dis pla y P ro pe rti es wi ndo w a ppe ar s, cl ick t he Sc ree n Sa ver ta b. 7. Cli ck the Po wer bu tt on on th e Mo nit or pow er s ect ion t o ope n t he Po wer Op tio ns P rop ert ie s win dow . 8 . O n t h e P o we r sc h e me s se c t io n , c l i ck , t he n se l e ct a ny o pt i o n except Home/OfîÂÂce Desktop or Always On. 9. Cli ck App ly , th en cl ic k O K . 10 . C los e th e D isp la y Pro per tie s wi ndo w. Af ter yo u a dj us t t he po we r s che me, th e C PU int er na l f req ue nc y s lig htl y de cre ase s w he n the CP U lo adi ng is lo w. The screen displays and procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
ASUS P5W DH Deluxe A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with Hyper-Threading T echnology . ⢠Hy per -Thr ead ing Te chn ol ogy is sup por ted und er Win dow s î XP/2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only . Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Installing Windows î XP Service Pack 1 or later version is recommended. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading T echnology , visit www.intel. com/info/hyperthreading. Using the Hyper-Threading T echnology T o use the Hyper-Threading T echnology: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup. Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading T echnology is set to Enabled. Se e p age 4- 25 for details. The BIOS item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 3. Restart the computer .
A-4 Appendix: CPU features